WO2019242738A1 - Method for sending modulation symbols, method for receiving modulation symbols and communication equipment - Google Patents

Method for sending modulation symbols, method for receiving modulation symbols and communication equipment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019242738A1
WO2019242738A1 PCT/CN2019/092303 CN2019092303W WO2019242738A1 WO 2019242738 A1 WO2019242738 A1 WO 2019242738A1 CN 2019092303 W CN2019092303 W CN 2019092303W WO 2019242738 A1 WO2019242738 A1 WO 2019242738A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
modulation symbol
symbol sequence
interleaving
modulation
deinterleaving
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/092303
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴艺群
陈雁
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019242738A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019242738A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0071—Use of interleaving
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path

Definitions

  • Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method for transmitting a modulation symbol, a method for receiving a modulation symbol, and a communication device.
  • wireless channels usually show frequency selective fading due to the influence of multipath propagation, that is, different frequency resource locations have different channel qualities. If accurate channel quality information is obtained through channel estimation in advance, it can be transmitted at a frequency domain resource location with good channel quality to improve transmission efficiency. If accurate channel quality information is not obtained, the data of the same user may be concentrated on the same poor quality channel, which may seriously affect the communication of the user, reducing the reliability and efficiency of the communication.
  • the present application provides a method and device for transmitting a modulation symbol, a method and device for receiving a modulation symbol, and a communication device, which can improve the reliability and efficiency of communication.
  • a method for transmitting a modulation symbol comprises: expanding a modulation symbol sequence including a plurality of modulation symbols according to an expansion factor L, wherein the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to K ⁇ L Modulation symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; first interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence; and mapping the modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving to K ⁇ L resource units and send.
  • the first interleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
  • the “unit” of the interleaving may refer to an object shifted by the interleaving.
  • the modulation symbol sequence in this application corresponds to the above-mentioned data set, and the modulation symbol corresponds to data.
  • the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit can be understood as that, after the first interleaving, the position of some modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence in the interleaved block to which the modulation symbol belongs is changed .
  • the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit can also be understood as the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as granularity (or granularity).
  • One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols).
  • the interleaver For the data in the input interleaving block, the interleaver, The position is changed within the range of the interleaved block.
  • modulation symbol # 1 and modulation symbol # 2 are two adjacent modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may not be adjacent in the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be modulation symbols in the same virtual resource block (VRB).
  • VRB virtual resource block
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different VRBs.
  • the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 are different.
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different physical resource blocks (PRBs), or after the first interleaving, the modulation symbol
  • PRBs physical resource blocks
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be modulation symbols in the same VRB bundle.
  • a VRB set may include S VRBs, where S may be an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • S may be 2, that is, one VRB set may include 2 VRBs.
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different VRB sets.
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different PRB sets.
  • One PRB set may include S PRBs, and the S may be greater than or equal to 1. Integer.
  • S may be 2, that is, one PRB set may include 2 PRBs.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponding to one or more OFDM symbols can be understood as that the extended modulation symbol sequence can be mapped on one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain.
  • performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
  • the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
  • the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
  • the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block.
  • the modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving.
  • the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols.
  • OFDM symbol # 2 this application is not particularly limited.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • any one of the T OFDM symbols after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L.
  • performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: determining a first interleaving matrix according to the extension factor L.
  • the first interleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, and N is a positive integer. ;
  • the first interleaved modulation symbol is output in space.
  • the first interleaving before outputting the first interleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first interleaving further includes: Value, cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the cell identifier may be M.
  • the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i).
  • the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
  • n is the slot number
  • V can be Represents the round-up operation.
  • performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the following formula.
  • L represents the spreading factor
  • K represents the number of expansion units included in the modulation symbol sequence
  • i ⁇ K + j represents the position of the modulation symbol before interleaving
  • ⁇ (i ⁇ K + j) represents the position of the modulation symbol after interleaving, That is, i + j ⁇ L.
  • performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and according to the first interleaving sequence, The spread modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
  • the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
  • ⁇ (i) mod (f 1 ⁇ i 2 + f 2 ⁇ i, L ⁇ K)
  • ⁇ (i) represents the position of the ith modulation symbol in the modulation symbol sequence after interleaving
  • L ⁇ K is the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence, where L represents an expansion factor and K represents the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the number of expansion units, f 1 and f 2 are predefined parameters, and a k is determined based on the above-mentioned cell identifier.
  • the cell identifier may be M in this application.
  • a k may be equal to M, or equal to A random number initialized with M (or, it may also be referred to as a random sequence).
  • the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
  • n is the slot number
  • the execution body of the method may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct first interleaving of the extended modulation symbol sequence; And the first interleaving of the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the extended modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved .
  • the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets
  • each VRB set includes S VRBs
  • each The PRB sets include S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K ⁇ L resource units and transmitted, including: using the VRB set For the unit, a second interleaving is performed on the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving; a plurality of VRBs in the second interleaving modulation symbol sequence are mapped to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and transmitted.
  • a method for receiving a modulation symbol including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K ⁇ L modulation symbols through K ⁇ L resource units, where L is an expansion factor, and L is An integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence; and performing a despreading on the first deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence according to an expansion factor L.
  • the first deinterleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
  • the “unit” of deinterleaving may refer to an object that is deinterleaved.
  • the modulation symbol sequence in this application corresponds to the above-mentioned data set, and the modulation symbol corresponds to data.
  • the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit can be understood as the position of some modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence in the interleaved block to which the modulation symbol belongs after the first deinterleaving. Changed.
  • One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one de-interleaving process, that is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). , Change the position within the range of the interleaved block.
  • modulation symbol # 3 and modulation symbol # 4 there are two non-adjacent modulation symbols (denoted as modulation symbol # 3 and modulation symbol # 4) in the modulation symbol sequence before the first deinterleaving. After the first deinterleaving, the modulation symbols # 3 and The modulation symbol # 4 may be adjacent in the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be modulation symbols in a VRB.
  • the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 are different.
  • the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same VRB, or after the first deinterleaving, the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 are the same. .
  • the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different PRBs, or if the de-resource mapping and the first de-interleaving are not performed, then The PRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 are different.
  • the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be modulation symbols in different VRB bundles.
  • a VRB set may include S VRBs, where S may be an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • S may be 2, that is, one VRB set may include 2 VRBs.
  • the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same VRB set.
  • the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same PRB set, where one PRB set may include S PRBs, and the S may be greater than or equal An integer of 1.
  • S may be 2, that is, one PRB set may include 2 PRBs.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and performing first deinterleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
  • the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
  • the value of T may be 1, that is, the receiving device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in a deinterleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbol in one OFDM symbol is at It remains within the OFDM symbol after deinterleaving.
  • the value of T may be 2, that is, the receiving device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in a deinterleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block.
  • the modulation symbols in the two OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after deinterleaving.
  • the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 3) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 3 after deinterleaving, or may be located in another of the two OFDM symbols.
  • this application is not particularly limited.
  • the receiving device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in a de-interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols within the T OFDM symbols as one interleave block are in After de-interleaving, it is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • the modulation symbol may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
  • performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: determining a first interleaving matrix according to the extension factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, and N is a positive integer; Fill the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix with the modulation symbols to be first deinterleaved according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix; The first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output in space.
  • the first deinterleaving before outputting the first deinterleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first deinterleaving further includes: according to the first shift value, The elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix are cyclically shifted, and the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the cell identifier may be M.
  • the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
  • n is the slot number
  • V can be Represents the round-up operation.
  • performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the following formula.
  • L represents the spreading factor
  • K represents the number of expansion units included in the modulation symbol sequence
  • i + j ⁇ L represents the position of the modulation symbol before deinterleaving
  • ⁇ (i + j ⁇ L) represents the modulation symbol after deinterleaving.
  • the first de-interleaving the modulation symbol sequence includes: determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and according to the first interleaving sequence, The modulation symbol sequence is first deinterleaved.
  • the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
  • ⁇ (i) mod (f 1 ⁇ i 2 + f 2 ⁇ i, L ⁇ K)
  • ⁇ (i) represents the position of the ith modulation symbol in the modulation symbol sequence after interleaving
  • L ⁇ K is the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence, where L represents an expansion factor and K represents the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the number of expansion units, f 1 and f 2 are predefined parameters, and a k is determined based on the above-mentioned cell identifier.
  • the cell identifier may be M in this application.
  • a k may be equal to M, or equal to A random number initialized with M (or, it may also be referred to as a random sequence).
  • the execution body of the method may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence; and Performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence needs to be One intertwined.
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets
  • each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • the method further includes: performing a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence using the VRB set as a unit;
  • the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
  • a method for transmitting a modulation symbol including: expanding each modulation symbol sequence in a plurality of modulation symbol sequences according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K ⁇ L modulations Symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the multiple modulation symbol sequences correspond one-to-one with multiple transmission layers; each of the extended multiple modulation symbol sequences is modulated
  • the symbol sequence is adjusted separately, the adjustment includes power adjustment and / or phase modulation; pre-processing of the adjusted multiple modulation symbol sequences, the pre-processing includes superposition and / or pre-coding; and the pre-modulated modulation symbols
  • the sequence is first interleaved; the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K ⁇ L resource units and transmitted.
  • a method for transmitting a modulation symbol including: spreading each modulation symbol sequence in a plurality of transmission layer modulation symbol sequences according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K ⁇ L modulation symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the plurality of modulation symbol sequences correspond one-to-one with a plurality of transmission layers;
  • Each modulation symbol sequence is adjusted separately, the adjustment includes power adjustment and / or phase modulation; performing a first interleaving on the adjusted modulation symbol sequence; and pre-processing a plurality of modulation symbol sequences after the first interleaving, said The pre-processing includes superposition and / or pre-coding; the modulation symbols in the pre-processed modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K ⁇ L resource units and sent.
  • the first interleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit,
  • the interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
  • the modulation symbol sequence as the processing target of the first interleaving corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the first interleaving is an interleaving using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
  • the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
  • the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
  • the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block.
  • the modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving.
  • the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols.
  • OFDM symbol # 2 this application is not particularly limited.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • any one of the T OFDM symbols after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the first interlace is an interlace based on the spreading factor L.
  • a first interleaving matrix may be determined according to the expansion factor L.
  • the first interleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, where N is a positive integer; and according to a column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the modulation symbols to be interleaved by the first are filled.
  • the first interleaving may further include: Bit value, cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the first interleaving may include interleaving based on a first interleaving sequence, where the first interleaving sequence is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
  • ⁇ (i) mod (f 1 ⁇ i 2 + f 2 ⁇ i, L ⁇ K)
  • the execution body of the method may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the method when the method is performed by a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to interleave a modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
  • the method when the method is performed by a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence sent by the network device is interleaved in units of modulation symbols.
  • the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets
  • each VRB set includes S VRBs
  • each The PRB sets include S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K ⁇ L resource units and transmitted, including: using the VRB set For the unit, a second interleaving is performed on the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving; a plurality of VRBs in the second interleaving modulation symbol sequence are mapped to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and transmitted.
  • a method for receiving a modulation symbol including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K ⁇ L modulation symbols through K ⁇ L resource units, where L is an expansion factor and L is An integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the modulation symbol sequence is generated by preprocessing the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers, and the preprocessing includes superposition or precoding;
  • the modulation symbol sequence is first deinterleaved; and according to the modulation symbol sequence after the first deinterleaving, a modulation symbol sequence corresponding to a first transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers is determined, where the first transmission layer is the Any one of a plurality of transmission layers; and according to an expansion factor L, the modulation symbol sequence corresponding to the first transmission layer is despread.
  • a method for receiving a modulation symbol including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K ⁇ L modulation symbols through K ⁇ L resource units, where L is an expansion factor and L is An integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the modulation symbol sequence is generated by preprocessing the modulation symbols corresponding to the multiple transmission layers, and the preprocessing includes superposition or precoding;
  • the modulation symbol sequence determines a modulation symbol sequence corresponding to a first transmission layer in the plurality of transmission layers, where the first transmission layer is any one of the plurality of transmission layers; for the first transmission,
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponding to the layer is first deinterleaved; and the modulation symbol sequence after the first deinterleaving is despread according to the expansion factor L.
  • the first deinterleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
  • the modulation symbol sequence that is the processing object of the first deinterleaving corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the first deinterleaving is interleaving using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
  • the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
  • the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
  • the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block.
  • the modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving.
  • the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols.
  • OFDM symbol # 2 this application is not particularly limited.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleave block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleave block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols.
  • any one of the T OFDM symbols after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the first deinterleaving is an interleaving based on the spreading factor L.
  • a first deinterleaving matrix may be determined according to the expansion factor L.
  • the first deinterleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, and N is a positive integer.
  • the first deinterleaving matrix is to be deinterleaved.
  • the modulation symbols are filled into the storage space corresponding to the first deinterleaving matrix.
  • the first deinterleaved modulation symbols are output from the storage space corresponding to the first deinterleaving matrix.
  • the first deinterleaved may further include: According to the first shift value, the elements in the i-th column of the first de-interleaving matrix are cyclically shifted, and the i-th column is any one of the first de-interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the first deinterleaving may include interleaving based on a first deinterleaving sequence, and the first deinterleaving sequence is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
  • ⁇ (i) mod (f 1 ⁇ i 2 + f 2 ⁇ i, L ⁇ K)
  • the execution body of the method may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the method when the method is performed by a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to deinterleave a modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
  • the method when the method is performed by a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets
  • each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • the method further includes: performing a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence using the VRB set as a unit;
  • the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
  • a communication device including a unit for performing each step of the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects and the implementation methods thereof.
  • the communication device is a communication chip.
  • the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for transmitting information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the communication device is a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for transmitting information or data, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the terminal device executes any one of the first to sixth aspects and its possible Method in implementation.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • the processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing, and the receiver and the transmitter may be respectively used to perform, such as, but not limited to, radio frequency transceiver.
  • the above devices may be provided on separate chips, or at least partly or entirely on the same chip.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be provided on the receiver chip and the transmitter chip which are independent of each other. It can be integrated into a transceiver and then set on the transceiver chip.
  • the processor may be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor.
  • the analog baseband processor and the transceiver may be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor may be provided on a separate chip.
  • digital baseband processors can be used with multiple application processors (such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip.
  • application processors such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.
  • Such a chip may be referred to as a system chip. Whether each device is independently set on a different chip or integrated on one or more chips depends on the specific needs of the product design. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the above device.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the processor may be a chip, an input circuit may be an input pin, an output circuit may be an output pin, and a processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output
  • the circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including: a memory and a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read an instruction stored in the memory, and can receive a signal through a receiver and transmit a signal through a transmitter to execute any one of the first to sixth aspects and the first to sixth aspects.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • a chip including a processor and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, and the computer program is used to implement the first aspect to the first.
  • the method in the six aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to sixth aspects.
  • a computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions) that when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic architecture diagram of a communication system of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another example of the configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a division manner of time-frequency resources in the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of the SCMA technology.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an example of the MUSA technology.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of an extension method of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of the expansion method of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of still another example of the expansion method of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interleaved block of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another example of the interleaved block of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an example of interleaving in units of RBs of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of still another example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of still another example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic flowchart of an example of an apparatus for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • 22 is a schematic flowchart of an example of an apparatus for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram of an example of a terminal device of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a network device of the present application.
  • GSM global mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or User device.
  • Terminal equipment can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in future 5G networks, or public land mobile networks (PLMN) in future evolution Terminal equipment and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • PLMN public land mobile networks
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • the IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and internet of things.
  • the IOT technology can implement, for example, a narrowband NB technology to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving.
  • the NB includes only one resource block (RBb), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB.
  • RBb resource block
  • the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device.
  • the network device may be a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) system or a code division multiple access (CDMA) system.
  • the base station (base transceiver, station, or BTS) can also be a base station (node B, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station in an LTE system ( evolved node (B, eNB or eNodeB), or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device may be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device And network equipment in the future 5G network or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., can be access points (AP) in WLAN, or gNB in new radio (NR) systems
  • AP access points
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
  • gNB new radio
  • an access network device provides services to a cell
  • a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell.
  • a transmission resource for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource
  • It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time.
  • the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • Cell ID cell identification
  • the concept of a carrier is the same as a cell.
  • a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.
  • the core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling the access network device, and may distribute data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.
  • the network side for example, the Internet
  • terminal equipment The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system.
  • This application layer contains applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the application can be run to provide the program according to the embodiment of the application.
  • the communication may be performed by using the method described above.
  • the method execution subject provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module in the terminal device or the network device that can call a program and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system 100 to which a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention can be applied.
  • the system 100 includes an access network device 102, and the access network device 102 may include one antenna or multiple antennas, for example, antennas 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, and 114.
  • the access network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that each of them can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, Router, demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
  • the access network device 102 may communicate with multiple terminal devices (such as the terminal device 116 and the terminal device 122). However, it can be understood that the access network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to the terminal device 116 or the terminal device 122.
  • the terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular phones, smartphones, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and / or any other suitable devices for communicating on the wireless communication system 100. device.
  • the terminal device 116 communicates with the antennas 112 and 114, where the antennas 112 and 114 send information to the terminal device 116 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink) 118 and through the reverse link (also (Referred to as the uplink) 120 receives information from the terminal device 116.
  • the terminal device 122 communicates with the antennas 104 and 106, where the antennas 104 and 106 send information to the terminal device 122 through the forward link 124 and receive information from the terminal device 122 through the reverse link 126.
  • forward link 118 may use a different frequency band from reverse link 120, and forward link 124 may use a different frequency band than reverse link 126.
  • the frequency band may be used in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • the forward link 118 and the reverse link 120 may use a common frequency band
  • the link 126 may use a common frequency band.
  • Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the access network device 102.
  • the antenna group may be designed to communicate with terminal devices in a sector covered by the access network device 102.
  • An access network device can send signals to all terminal devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity.
  • the transmitting antenna of the access network device 102 can also use beamforming to improve the forward link 118 and 124. Signal to noise ratio.
  • the access network device 102 uses beamforming to randomly scattered terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area. When transmitting signals, mobile devices in adjacent cells experience less interference.
  • the access network device 102, the terminal device 116, or the terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication sending device and / or a wireless communication receiving device.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel.
  • Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate a plurality of code blocks.
  • the communication system 100 may be a PLMN network, a D2D network, an M2M network, an IoT network, or other networks.
  • FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example.
  • the network may also include other access network devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
  • the solution of the present application can be applied to a communication process between two communication devices (for example, a transmitting device and a receiving device).
  • the solution of the present application may also be applied to a communication process between multiple (for example, three or more) communication devices.
  • a signal or data transmitting device (hereinafter, referred to as a transmitting device) may be a terminal device, and a signal or data receiving device (hereinafter, referred to as a receiving device) may be a network device.
  • the network device # 1, the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 constitute a single-cell communication system.
  • the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 may respectively serve as sending devices in the present application and may simultaneously send uplink data to the network device # 1 serving as the receiving device in the present application.
  • the sending device may be a network device
  • the receiving device may be a terminal device.
  • the network device # 1, the network device # 2, the terminal device # / 1, and the terminal device # 2 constitute a multi-cell communication system.
  • the terminal device # 1 may be located in a cell of the network device # 1. Therefore, the network device # 1 may respectively serve as a sending device in this application and may send downlink data to the terminal device # / 1 as a receiving device in this application .
  • the terminal device # 2 may be located in a cell of the network device # 2.
  • the network device # 2 may serve as a sending device in this application, and may send downlink data to the terminal device # / 2 serving as a receiving device in this application.
  • the downlink data sending process of network device # 1 and network device # 2 may be performed simultaneously.
  • the sending device may be a terminal device
  • the receiving device may be a terminal device.
  • the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 constitute a D2D communication system.
  • the terminal device # 1 and the terminal device # 2 may respectively serve as the sending device in this application and may simultaneously send data to the terminal device # 3 as the receiving device in this application.
  • the sending device may be a terminal device and a network device
  • the receiving device may be a terminal device.
  • the network device # 1, the terminal device # 1, and the terminal device # 2 constitute a single-cell communication system.
  • the network device # 1 and the terminal device # 1 may serve as sending devices in this application, and may simultaneously send data to the terminal device # 2 serving as a receiving device in this application.
  • sending data simultaneously can be understood as: different sending devices use the same time-frequency resource to send data.
  • the same sending device may send data to different receiving devices through the same time-frequency resource.
  • FIG. 6 shows an example of a division method of time-frequency resources in the present application.
  • the wireless resources are divided into multiple subcarriers in the frequency domain, and are divided into multiple orthogonal frequency divisions in the time domain.
  • Multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbols form a time-frequency resource grid.
  • 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain form a resource block (RB).
  • NCP normal cyclic prefix
  • 14 consecutive OFDM symbols in the time domain form a slot.
  • the subcarrier space (SCS) is, for example, 15 kHz
  • the time domain length of a time slot is 1 ms.
  • Each resource element (resource element) corresponds to one subcarrier in the frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in the time domain. It can be understood that the sizes of the RB and the slot may also have other specifications, which are not limited in this application.
  • orthogonal frequency division multiple access FDMA
  • time division multiple access TDMA
  • code division multiple access CDMA
  • orthogonal frequency division multiplex multiple access OFDMA
  • NOMA non-orthogonal multiple access
  • NOMA technology improves system capacity by enabling multiple terminal devices to use the same time-frequency resources to transmit data.
  • a common NOMA scheme is that the transmission signals of the transmitting equipment are superimposed in the power domain, and the receiving equipment uses an interference cancellation algorithm to eliminate interference between UEs.
  • SCMA sparse code multiple access
  • MUSA multi-user shared access
  • Figure 7 shows a schematic diagram of the SCMA technology.
  • the sparse code includes 6 different sparse codes.
  • the 4 REs corresponding to each sparse code are defined as an extension unit, and the size of the extension unit is defined as Expansion factor, here the expansion factor is 4.
  • the expansion factor can also be other values. Among them, the first and third REs of the sparse code 1 are fixed to 0, the second and fourth REs are fixed to 0, and so on.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic of MUSA technology.
  • the MUSA extension sequence includes 8 different extension sequences.
  • the 4 REs corresponding to each extension sequence are defined as an extension unit, and the corresponding extension factor is 4.
  • wireless channels usually show frequency selective fading due to the influence of multipath propagation, that is, different frequency resource locations have different channel qualities. If accurate channel quality information is obtained through channel estimation in advance, it can be transmitted at a frequency domain resource location with good channel quality to improve transmission efficiency. If accurate channel quality information cannot be obtained, frequency-domain diversity transmission can be used, that is, transmission at different frequency-domain resource locations to improve transmission reliability. The solution of the present application can effectively improve the effect of frequency domain diversity transmission.
  • FIG. 9 shows a process 200 of sending data by the sending device #A.
  • the sending device #A may perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a bit scrambling module or other module or unit to obtain Scrambled bits.
  • the input bits here may be coded bits after the information bits are channel-coded.
  • the channel coding can provide a certain error correction capability.
  • the specific coding method can be a low density check code (LDPC), a turbo code, a polar code, and the like.
  • the input bit may be a bit sequence
  • bit scrambling is an XOR operation of the input bit sequence and the scrambled sequence bit by bit to obtain the scrambled bits.
  • the scrambling sequence can be generated according to a predefined rule, which itself has a certain randomness.
  • different sending devices can use different scrambling sequences for scrambling, so that the correlation between data of different sending devices can be reduced, and interference generated during simultaneous sending can be reduced.
  • bit scrambling module may be replaced by bit interleaving, and bit interleaving and bit scrambling have similar functions. Bit interleaving and bit scrambling can also be used at the same time, and scrambling can be performed before interleaving, or interleaving can be performed before scrambling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the transmitting device #A may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
  • modulation can be regarded as a mapping of bits to symbols (or modulation symbols).
  • modulation scheme a ⁇ / 2 binary phase shift keying (BPSK) modulation scheme, a BPSK modulation scheme, a quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) modulation scheme, 16 Quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) modulation scheme, 64QAM modulation scheme, 256QAM modulation scheme, etc.
  • BPSK binary phase shift keying
  • QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
  • QAM 16 Quadrature amplitude modulation
  • 64QAM modulation scheme 64QAM modulation scheme
  • 256QAM modulation scheme etc.
  • a codebook of SCMA maps two bits to two REs. For example, 00 is mapped to (1, 0), 01 is mapped to (0, 1), and 10 is mapped to (0, -1). Map 11 to (-1, 0), where the two symbols in parentheses correspond to two REs, respectively.
  • the transmitting device #A may perform symbol extension on the modulation symbol sequence by using, for example, an extension module or unit to obtain an extended modulation symbol sequence.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of the extension method of the present application.
  • the modulation symbol sequence as an extension target includes two modulation symbols, that is, 1 and -1.
  • the extension method shown in FIG. 10 may be performed based on the extension sequence.
  • the extension sequence may be: [1, j, -1, -j] T , and the extension sequence and two inputs (that is, before the extension) ) Modulation symbols are respectively multiplied to obtain an output (ie, extended) modulation symbol sequence.
  • the first 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence correspond to the first input modulation symbol, or the first 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence are the first input modulation symbol after being expanded Generated after.
  • the last 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence correspond to the second input modulation symbol, or the last 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence are generated after the second input modulation symbol is extended. of.
  • the spreading factor can be defined as the length of the spreading sequence, and the spreading factor is 4 in FIG. 10.
  • the expansion factor can also be understood as the size or length of the expansion unit.
  • the spreading factor can also be called a spreading factor.
  • the output symbol corresponding to each sign extension operation is defined as an extension unit.
  • the extension factor may be determined by a network device and delivered to a terminal device, or the extension factor may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • Each expansion unit in FIG. 10 includes 4 output symbols.
  • other spreading factors can be used.
  • the expansion factor is smaller, the resources occupied by each expansion unit are less, the more data can be carried by the same resource, and the corresponding spectrum efficiency is higher.
  • the expansion factor is larger, the resources occupied by each expansion unit are more, the transmission reliability is improved, and the corresponding network coverage is enhanced.
  • the expansion factor L may be an integer.
  • the expansion factor L may be 1 or the expansion factor L may be an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • FIG. 11 shows another example of the extension method of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a debug symbol sequence as an extension target includes two modulation symbols, that is, 1 and -1.
  • the expansion method shown in FIG. 11 can be performed based on the expansion matrix.
  • the expansion matrix be W, and multiply the expansion matrix and the input modulation symbol to obtain an output modulation symbol.
  • the spreading method based on the spreading matrix may have multiple input modulation symbols at a time.
  • the expansion factor corresponds to the number of rows of the expansion matrix W.
  • the expansion factor can also be understood as the size or length of the expansion unit.
  • each sign extension unit in FIG. 11 includes 4 output symbols.
  • FIG. 12 shows another example of the extension method of the present application, in which the extension can be performed based on a set of extension sequences, that is, N input modulation symbols are mapped into N modulation symbol sequences, that is, each input modulation symbol sequence Each is mapped into a modulation symbol sequence.
  • the output modulation symbol sequence after expansion may be [1, j, -1, -j].
  • the spreading factor may be defined as the number of symbols included in the spread modulation symbol sequence.
  • the expansion factor corresponding to FIG. 12 is 4, and each expansion unit contains 4 output symbols.
  • the expansion factor can also be adjusted to improve spectrum efficiency or enhance network coverage.
  • the transmitting device may interleave the extended modulation symbol sequence through, for example, an interleaving module or unit.
  • the interleaving is performed by using a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
  • the unit (or granularity) of interleaving may refer to an object that is shifted during the interleaving process.
  • two adjacent RBs (or RB sets) before interleaving are not adjacent after interleaving.
  • the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) before and after interleaving do not change.
  • two adjacent modulation symbols before interleaving may not be adjacent after interleaving.
  • the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) are changed before and after interleaving.
  • two adjacent modulation symbols before interleaving may not be adjacent after interleaving
  • each modulation symbol pair includes adjacent
  • the modulation symbols in most (or possibly all) of the multiple modulation symbol pairs are no longer adjacent, and only a few (or may not) be in the modulation symbol pairs The modulation symbols are still adjacent.
  • At least one of the following methods may be used for interleaving.
  • the interleaved object include K extension units, and let the extension factor be L. Then the number of symbols after expansion is K ⁇ L.
  • the transmitting device #A may arrange K ⁇ L symbols (denoted as ⁇ s 0 , s 1 ,..., S KL-1 ) in a row-to-row manner as shown in Table 1 below.
  • the transmitting device #A may fill the modulation symbol sequence ⁇ s 0 , s 1 , ..., s KL-1 ⁇ into the interleaving matrix (or the storage space corresponding to the interleaving matrix) in a leading -to- back manner.
  • the transmitting device #A may output the interleaved modulation symbol sequence in rows.
  • the interleaved modulation symbol sequence may be s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 ,..., s L-1 ,..., s LK-1 .
  • the number of rows of the row-column interleaving (or row-column interleaving matrix) shown in Table 1 can be an expansion factor L, so that the L symbols of an extension unit are sufficiently dispersed in the interleaved symbol sequence to achieve frequency domain diversity. transmission.
  • the relationship between the number of rows and columns interleaved and the expansion factor L listed above is only exemplary, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the number of rows of the row and column interleaving matrix may be an integer multiple of the expansion factor L.
  • the transmitting device #A may also perform cyclic shift on the modulation symbols filled in the interleaving matrix according to the column direction. Bit.
  • the first column of Table 2 may be the same as the first column of Table 1, that is, the shift value of the first column may be 0.
  • the second column is cyclically shifted with a shift value of 1, that is, transformed from the sequence ⁇ s L , s L + 1 , ..., s 2L-1 ⁇ to ⁇ s 2L-1 , s L , ..., s 2L -2 ⁇ .
  • the third column is cyclically shifted with a shift value of 2, which is transformed from the sequence ⁇ s 2L , s 2L + 1 , ..., s 3L-1 ⁇ to ⁇ s 3L-2 , s 3L-1 , ..., s 3L-3 ⁇ .
  • the above-mentioned shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the cell identifier may be M.
  • the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
  • n is the slot number
  • the cyclic shift value ⁇ (i) of the i-th column can be determined according to the following formula:
  • V can be Represents the round-up operation.
  • the cell identifier in this application may be M.
  • the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula :
  • the above-mentioned cell identifier M may be sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the spread symbols can be further dispersed, thereby obtaining a frequency domain diversity gain.
  • quadratic permutation polynomial (QPP) interleaving method quadratic permutation polynomial (QPP) interleaving method
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K ⁇ L symbols.
  • f 1 and f 2 are selected according to the interleave block size LxK.
  • LxK interleave block size
  • the interleaving may also be determined based on a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving device is located.
  • Equation 2 the position (denoted as ⁇ (i)) in the interleaved modulation symbol sequence can be expressed as Equation 2 below.
  • ⁇ (i) can be determined by the above formula 1, and a k is a parameter determined based on the cell identity.
  • a k can be the cell identity itself, or the a k can also be a random number initialized based on the cell identity. .
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence may correspond to one or more OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
  • the interleaving may be performed using an OFDM symbol group as an interleaving block.
  • One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one interleaving process. That is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). The position is changed within the range of the interleaved block.
  • one OFDM symbol group may include one OFDM symbol.
  • One OFDM symbol group may also include multiple (for example, two or more) OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
  • one OFDM symbol group may also include T OFDM symbols, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the specific value of T may be determined by network device #A and issued through, for example, higher-level signaling. To terminal device #A.
  • the size of the interleaved (or deinterleaved) interleaved blocks may be determined by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
  • the specific value of T may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol, which is not particularly limited in this application.
  • the above-mentioned interleaving in units of modulation symbols may be performed based on a predetermined trigger instruction.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to execute S240 based on whether a trigger instruction #a is received.
  • the trigger instruction indicates that the #a transmitting device needs to perform interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
  • the network device may send a trigger instruction #b to the sending device.
  • the trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the receiving device needs to deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols. Or, in other words, the trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is interleaved in units of modulation symbols. Therefore, the receiving device may determine whether to execute the sequence based on whether the trigger instruction #b is received. Deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols (detailed later).
  • a network device may determine factors such as channel quality, service requirements, and the like to determine whether to perform interleaving or deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols.
  • the network device may determine that interleaving in units of modulation symbols is required.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates an interleaving process of the present application when an OFDM symbol is used as an interleaving block (or, an OFDM symbol group includes one OFDM symbol).
  • one OFDM symbol includes M modulation symbols, and the arrangement order of the M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol # 1, modulation symbol # 2, modulation symbol # 3, ..., modulation symbol #M .
  • the interleaving is to modulate symbols in the OFDM symbol group (that is, one OFDM symbol) to the OFDM symbol group (that is, one The arrangement order in OFDM symbols) is changed.
  • the arrangement order of the M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol #L, ..., modulation symbol #ML, modulation symbol # 1, ..., modulation symbol # M-L + 1 , ..., modulation symbol # L-1, ..., modulation symbol # M-1.
  • OFDM symbol # 1 and OFDM symbol # 2 are respectively two OFDM symbol groups, and based on one OFDM symbol shown in FIG. 13 as one In the interleaving of an interleaved block, it is assumed that one modulation symbol #A is located at OFDM symbol # 1 before interleaving, and after interleaving, the modulation symbol #A will not be located at OFDM symbol # 2.
  • FIG. 14 shows an interleaving process of the present application when 2 (that is, an example of T) OFDM symbols are used as one interleaving block (or one OFDM symbol group includes 2 OFDM symbols).
  • one OFDM symbol include M modulation symbols, that is, one OFDM symbol group includes 2M modulation symbols, and let the arrangement order of 2M modulation symbols be: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol # 1, modulation symbol # 2, Modulation symbols # 3, ..., modulation symbols # 2M.
  • the interleaving is to modulate symbols in the OFDM symbol group (that is, 2 OFDM symbols) to the OFDM symbol group (that is, , 2 OFDM symbols).
  • the arrangement order of the 2M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol #L, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-L, modulation symbol # 1, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-L +1, ..., modulation symbol # L-1, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-1.
  • two adjacent OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1 and OFDM symbol # 2) are respectively set as one OFDM symbol group.
  • OFDM symbol # 1 and OFDM symbol # 2 are respectively set as one OFDM symbol group.
  • a modulation symbol #A is located at OFDM symbol # 1 before interleaving.
  • the modulation symbol #A may be located at OFDM symbol # 2 or may be located at OFDM symbol # 1.
  • the transmitting device #A may map the interleaved modulation symbol sequence to the time-frequency resource as described above, so as to transmit the modulation symbol sequence through the time-frequency resource.
  • the process may be similar to the prior art.
  • detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #A may further interleave the modulation symbol sequences that have undergone one interleaving in units of RB sets.
  • one RB set may include, for example, 2 RBs.
  • the interleaving with the RB set as a unit may be performed in a mapping process from a virtual resource block (VRB) to a physical resource block (PRB).
  • VRB virtual resource block
  • PRB physical resource block
  • VRB is a frequency domain resource corresponding to resource allocation
  • PRB is a frequency domain resource corresponding to actual transmission.
  • an RB set (RB bundle) is used as a mapping unit.
  • Each RB set includes 2 RBs, and consecutively numbered VRBs are allocated to discontinuously numbered PRBs.
  • VRBs with numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 are mapped to PRBs with numbers 1, 2, 25, and 26.
  • Discontinuously numbered PRBs correspond to different frequency-domain resource locations, so frequency-domain diversity transmission can be achieved.
  • FIG. 16 shows a process 300 of receiving data by the receiving device #A.
  • the data may be data sent by the sending device #A, or the receiving device #A may be data sent by the sending device #A. Receiving end.
  • the data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
  • the receiving device #A may receive a modulation symbol sequence from a transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through a time-frequency resource.
  • the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #A may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #A may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence as a unit.
  • the deinterleaving process may be a reverse process of the process described in S340.
  • the deinterleaving is performed by using a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
  • the unit (or granularity) of deinterleaving may refer to an object shifted during the deinterleaving process.
  • two adjacent modulation symbols before deinterleaving are not adjacent after deinterleaving.
  • the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) before deinterleaving and after deinterleaving change.
  • At least one of the following methods may be used for deinterleaving.
  • the object of deinterleaving includes K extension units, and the extension factor is set to L.
  • the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence to be deinterleaved is K ⁇ L.
  • the receiving device #A can set K ⁇ L symbols (that is, s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 , ..., s L- 1 ,..., s LK-1 ), arranged in the manner shown in Table 1 below.
  • the receiving device #A can place the modulation symbol sequence s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 , ..., s L-1 , ..., s LK-1 are filled into the deinterleaving matrix (or the storage space corresponding to the deinterleaving matrix) in a first - matter -last-by- column manner.
  • the receiving device #A may output the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence in rows.
  • the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence may be ⁇ s 0 , s 1 , ..., s KL- 1 ⁇ .
  • the receiving device #A may also perform a cyclic shift accordingly to restore the interleaving matrix shown in Table 2 to that shown in Table 1, and then perform Output.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be deinterleaved includes K ⁇ L symbols.
  • the position of the K ⁇ L symbols is ⁇ (i), and the position in the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence is i.
  • the deinterleaving may also be determined based on a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving device is located.
  • the position of a symbol in the modulation symbol sequence before deinterleaving at ⁇ (i) is i after deinterleaving.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence may correspond to one or more OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
  • the deinterleaving may be performed using an OFDM symbol group as an interleaving block.
  • One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the deinterleaver in one deinterleaving process, that is, one deinterleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols).
  • the data in the block is changed in position within the range of the deinterleaved block.
  • one OFDM symbol group may include one OFDM symbol.
  • One OFDM symbol group may also include multiple (for example, two or more) OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
  • the de-interleaving process based on the OFDM symbol group may be a reverse process of the above-mentioned interleaving process of the OFDM symbol group. To avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the receiving device #A may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
  • the process may be the reverse process of the above S230.
  • detailed description is omitted.
  • the receiving device #A may demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence through a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
  • the process may be the reverse process of the above S220.
  • detailed description is omitted.
  • the receiving device #A may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
  • the above-mentioned deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols may be performed based on a predetermined trigger instruction #a (that is, an example of the first instruction information).
  • the terminal device may determine whether to perform S240 based on whether the above-mentioned trigger instruction #a is received.
  • the network device may determine factors such as channel quality and service requirements to determine whether a terminal device is required to perform the S240.
  • the network device may determine that interleaving in units of modulation symbols is required.
  • the network device may send the trigger instruction #a to the terminal device, and the trigger instruction instructs the #a sending device to interleave the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit.
  • the network device may also send a trigger instruction #b to the sending device.
  • the trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the receiving device needs to perform a modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as Unit de-interleaving, or in other words, the trigger instruction #b can be used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is interleaved with the modulation symbol as a unit, so that the receiving device can base on whether the trigger instruction #b is received, It is determined whether to perform deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols (explained in detail later).
  • FIG. 17 shows a process 400 in which the sending device #B sends data.
  • the sending device #B can perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a module or unit such as a bit scrambling module to obtain Scrambled bits.
  • the process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S210. Here, in order to avoid redundant descriptions, detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the transmitting device #B may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
  • the process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S220. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #B may perform layer mapping on the modulation symbols by using a module or unit such as a layer mapping module to determine the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #B may extend the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer separately.
  • the process of extending the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in the above S230. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer includes K ⁇ L modulation symbols.
  • the transmitting device #B may adjust the expanded modulation symbol through a module or unit such as an adjustment module.
  • the modulation may include power adjustment, or the modulation may include phase modulation.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #B may pre-process the modulated modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a pre-processing module.
  • the pre-processing may include superposition, or the pre-processing may include pre-coding.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the pre-modulated modulation symbol sequence may include K ⁇ L modulation symbols.
  • the transmitting device #B may interleave the pre-modulated modulation symbols by using a module or a unit such as an interleaving module in units of modulation symbols.
  • the process may be similar to that of the sending device #A in S240. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the transmitting device #B may perform resource mapping and transmission of the interleaved modulation symbols through a module or a unit such as a transmitting module.
  • the process may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in S250. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • FIG. 18 shows a process 500 of receiving data by the receiving device #B.
  • the data may be data sent by the sending device #B, or the receiving device #B may be data sent by the sending device #B. Receiving end.
  • the data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
  • the receiving device #B may receive the modulation symbol sequence from the transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through the time-frequency resource.
  • the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #B may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #B may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence as a unit.
  • the de-interleaving process may be similar to the processing process of the receiving device #A in the above S420. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the deinterleaving is performed with a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
  • the receiving device #B may perform multi-layer joint decoding on the modulation symbol to obtain the modulation symbol of each transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the receiving device #B may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
  • the receiving device #B may demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence through a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
  • the receiving device #B may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
  • FIG. 19 shows a process 600 of transmitting data by the transmitting device #C.
  • the transmitting device #C may perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a module or unit such as a bit scrambling module to obtain Scrambled bits.
  • the process may be similar to the process of the occurrence of the device #A in S210. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #C may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
  • the process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S220. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #C may perform layer mapping on the modulation symbols through, for example, a layer mapping module and the like to determine the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #C may separately extend the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer.
  • the process of extending the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in the above S230. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer includes K ⁇ L modulation symbols.
  • the transmitting device #C may adjust the extended modulation symbol through a module or unit such as an adjustment module.
  • the modulation may include power adjustment, or the modulation may include phase modulation.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the transmitting device #C may interleave the pre-modulated modulation symbols by using a module or a unit such as an interleaving module in units of modulation symbols.
  • the process may be similar to that of the sending device #A in S240. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the transmitting device #C may preprocess the interleaved modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a preprocessing module.
  • the pre-processing may include superposition, or the pre-processing may include pre-coding.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the pre-modulated modulation symbol sequence may include K ⁇ L modulation symbols.
  • the transmitting device #C may perform resource mapping and transmission of the interleaved modulation symbols through a module or a unit such as a transmitting module.
  • the process may be similar to the process of sending device #A in S250. Here, to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • FIG. 20 shows a process 700 of receiving data by the receiving device #C.
  • the data may be data sent by the sending device #C, or the receiving device #C may be data sent by the sending device #C. Receiving end.
  • the data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
  • the receiving device #C may receive the modulation symbol sequence from the transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through the time-frequency resource.
  • the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #C may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
  • the receiving device #C may perform multi-layer joint decoding on the modulation symbol to obtain the modulation symbol of each transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers.
  • the process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
  • the receiving device #C may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer as a unit.
  • the process of de-interleaving the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the receiving device #A in the above S420. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the deinterleaving is performed with a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
  • the receiving device #C may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
  • the receiving device #C can demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
  • the receiving device #C may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
  • the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, thereby improving the reliability, accuracy and efficiency of communication .
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a device 10 for transmitting a modulation symbol according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 10 may be a device for transmitting a modulation symbol, or may be a chip or a circuit. Or circuit for a transmitting device.
  • the device 10 may include a processing unit 11 (that is, an example of a processing unit) and a storage unit 12.
  • the storage unit 12 is configured to store instructions
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 12 to enable the apparatus 10 for beam detection to implement a sending device (for example, the sending device # described above) corresponding to the method in FIG. 2.
  • the device 10 may further include an output port 14 (ie, another example of a communication unit).
  • the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • the storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 may be used to call and run the calculator program from the storage unit 12 to control the output port 14 to send signals and complete the steps of the sending device in the above method.
  • the storage unit 12 may be integrated in the processing unit 11, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 11.
  • the output port 14 is a transmitter.
  • the output port 14 is an output interface.
  • the function of the output port 14 may be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
  • a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 11 and the output port 14 is stored in the storage unit 12.
  • the general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11 and the output port 14 by executing the codes in the storage unit 12.
  • the processing unit 11 may expand a modulation symbol sequence including multiple modulation symbols according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K ⁇ L modulation symbols, where L is An integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Moreover, the processing unit 11 may perform the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols; the processing unit 11 may control the output port 14 to pass through The modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K ⁇ L resource units and transmitted.
  • the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence by using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured to determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, and N is a positive integer; the processing unit 11 may be used to perform the calculation according to the first The column direction of the interleaving matrix fills the modulation symbol to be interleaved first into the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix; the processing unit 11 may be configured to correspond to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix. Output the first interleaved modulation symbol in the storage space of.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform cyclic shift on the elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured to determine a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform an extended The subsequent modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
  • the terminal device may also receive first instruction information sent by a network device, where the first instruction information is used to indicate that after the extension Whether the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved; and the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence when the first indication information indicates that the extended modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved.
  • the network device may further send second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the extension The modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
  • the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs, each Each PRB set includes S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to one.
  • the processing unit 11 may be used to perform the second interleaving on the VRB set as a unit, and the processing unit 11 may be used to control the output port 14 to undergo the second interleaving.
  • Multiple VRBs in the modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and sent.
  • modules or units in the device 10 listed above are only examples, and the modules or units in the device 10 may be used to execute the sending device (for example, sending device #A, sending device #B) in the above method. Or each action or process performed by the sending device #C).
  • sending device #A for example, sending device #A, sending device #B
  • sending device #C each action or process performed by the sending device #C.
  • detailed description is omitted.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured by the processing unit 202 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23, and the output port 14 may be configured by the transceiver unit 201 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23.
  • the processing unit 11 may be configured by the baseband unit 402 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
  • the output port 14 may be formed by a remote radio frequency unit 401 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus 30 for receiving a modulation symbol according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 30 may be a receiving device (for example, receiving device #A), or a chip or a circuit. , Such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a network device.
  • the device 30 may include a processing unit 31 and a storage unit 32.
  • the storage unit 32 is configured to store instructions
  • the processing unit 31 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 32 to enable the apparatus 30 to implement the steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the device 30 may further include an input port 33 (ie, an example of a communication unit).
  • processing unit 31, the storage unit 32, and the input port 33 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the network device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the program code that implements the functions of the processing unit 31 and the input port 33 is stored in a storage unit, and the general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 31 and the input port 33 by executing the code in the storage unit.
  • the storage unit 32 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 31 may be used to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the input port 33 to receive K ⁇ L modulations through K ⁇ L resource units.
  • the modulation symbol sequence of the symbol where L is an expansion factor, L is an integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; it is used for first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols; Based on the spreading factor L, the first deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence is despread.
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence by using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of T is a predefined value.
  • the value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L.
  • the first interleaving matrix includes N ⁇ L rows, where N is a positive integer; according to a row direction of the first interleaving matrix, The first deinterleaved modulation symbol is filled into the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix; according to the column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform a cyclic shift on the elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  • the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to determine a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and used to perform a first interleaving sequence on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first interleaving sequence. Deinterlacing.
  • the terminal device is further configured to receive first instruction information sent by a network device, where the first instruction information is used to indicate Whether the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first deinterleaved before being despread.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence when the first indication information indicates that the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved before being despread.
  • the network device is further configured to send second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate modulation
  • the symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved before being mapped on the resource unit.
  • the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets
  • the K ⁇ L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 31 may be further configured to perform a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence by using the VRB set as a unit; and perform a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
  • each module or unit in the device 30 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and each module or unit in the device 30 may be used to perform a receiving device (for example, receiving device #A, receiving device #B) in the above method. Or each action or process performed by the receiving device #C).
  • a receiving device for example, receiving device #A, receiving device #B
  • each action or process performed by the receiving device #C for example, receiving device #C
  • detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • the processing unit 31 may be constituted by the processing unit 202 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23, and the input port 33 may be constituted by the transceiving unit 201 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured by the baseband unit 402 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
  • the input port 33 may be formed by a remote radio frequency unit 401 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided in this application. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 23 shows only the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 23, the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor is used to support the terminal device to execute the foregoing method for transmitting a precoding matrix.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, such as the codebook described in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the control circuit and the antenna can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input / output devices such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 23 shows only one memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processor.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processor is mainly used to control and execute the entire terminal device.
  • the processor in FIG. 23 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing communication protocols and communication data may be built in the processor or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and the control circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as the transmitting and receiving unit 201 of the terminal device 20.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the radio frequency signal.
  • Processing, and a processor having a processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20.
  • the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, and the like
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit and the like.
  • the terminal device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 200, 400, or 600 as a sending device of a signal or data.
  • the processing unit 202 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 11 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions in S210, S220, S230, and S240.
  • the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action performed by the output port 14 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S250.
  • the terminal device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 300, 500, or 700 as a signal or data receiving device.
  • the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action performed by the input port 33 in the foregoing device 30; or, in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S310.
  • the processing unit 202 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 31 in the device 30 described above; or in other words, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions in S320, S330, S340, and S350.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 according to an embodiment of the present application, which may be used to implement functions of a network device (for example, an access network device #A or a core network device # ⁇ ) in the foregoing method.
  • the network device 40 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also known as digital units, DUs). 402.
  • RRU 401 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012.
  • the RRU 401 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending a signaling message described in the foregoing embodiment to a terminal device.
  • the BBU 402 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling base stations.
  • the RRU 401 and the BBU 402 may be physically located together, or may be physically separated from each other, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 402 is a control center of a base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spreading, and so on.
  • the BBU (Processing Unit) 402 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure on the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the network device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 200, 400, or 600 as a sending device of a signal or data.
  • the BBU 402 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 11 in the foregoing device 10; or, in other words, the BBU 402 may perform the actions in S210, S220, S230, and S240.
  • the RRU 401 may perform the action performed by the output port 14 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S250.
  • the network device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 300, 500, or 700 as a signal or data receiving device.
  • the RRU 401 may perform the action performed by the input port 33 in the above device 30; or, in other words, the RRU 401 may perform the action in S310.
  • the BBU 402 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 31 in the above device 30; or, in other words, the BBU 402 may perform the actions in S320, S330, S340, and S350.
  • the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a single access system wireless access network (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), or may separately support different Access standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 402 further includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022.
  • the memory 4021 is configured to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor 4022 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 4021 and the processor 4022 may serve one or more single boards. That is, the memory and processor can be set separately on each board. It may also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of part 402 and part 401 may be implemented by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip
  • the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices.
  • a program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the base station related functions.
  • the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
  • FIG. 24 It should be understood that the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 24 is only one possible form, and should not be construed as any limitation in the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of base station structures that may appear in the future.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system including the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and special-purpose integrations.
  • Circuit application specific integrated circuit, ASIC
  • ready-made programmable gate array field programmable gate array, FPGA
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access Access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access Access memory
  • double SDRAM double SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory
  • direct RAMbus RAM direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination.
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, a computer, a server, or a data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not deal with the embodiments of this application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Error Detection And Correction (AREA)
  • Detection And Prevention Of Errors In Transmission (AREA)

Abstract

Provided by the present application is a method for sending modulation symbols, the method comprising: according to an expansion factor L, extending a modulation symbol sequence comprising a plurality of modulation symbols, the extended modulation symbol sequence comprising K×L modulation symbols, L being an integer greater than 1, and K being an integer greater than or equal to 1; performing first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence; and mapping the modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving to K×L resource units and sending the resource units. Since modulation symbols of a same user or a same service are usually continuous in a modulation symbol sequence after spectrum spreading, by interleaving a modulation symbol sequence to be sent and mapping the interleaved modulation symbol sequence onto resource units by enabling a sending device to use a modulation symbol as a unit, the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service may be dispersed in a frequency domain, which may improve the diversity gain, and thus improve the reliability and efficiency of communication.

Description

发送调制符号的方法、接收调制符号的方法和通信设备Method for transmitting modulation symbol, method for receiving modulation symbol, and communication device
本申请要求于2018年06月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810646764.6、申请名称为“发送调制符号的方法、接收调制符号的方法和通信设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed on June 21, 2018 with the Chinese Patent Office, application number 201810646764.6, and application name "Method for Sending Modulation Symbols, Method for Receiving Modulation Symbols, and Communication Equipment", its entire contents Incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及发送调制符号的方法、接收调制符号的方法和通信设备。Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method for transmitting a modulation symbol, a method for receiving a modulation symbol, and a communication device.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信***中，无线信道因为多径传播的影响通常呈现频率选择性衰落(frequency selective fading)，即不同频率资源位置具有不同的信道质量。如果预先通过信道估计获取准确的信道质量信息，可以在信道质量好的频域资源位置传输以提升传输效率。如果未能获取准确的信道质量信息，则可能因同一用户的数据集中在同一信道质量较差的信道而导致该用户的通信受到严重影响，降低了通信的可靠性和效率。In wireless communication systems, wireless channels usually show frequency selective fading due to the influence of multipath propagation, that is, different frequency resource locations have different channel qualities. If accurate channel quality information is obtained through channel estimation in advance, it can be transmitted at a frequency domain resource location with good channel quality to improve transmission efficiency. If accurate channel quality information is not obtained, the data of the same user may be concentrated on the same poor quality channel, which may seriously affect the communication of the user, reducing the reliability and efficiency of the communication.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
本申请提供一种发送调制符号的方法和装置、接收调制符号的方法和装置和通信设备，能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。The present application provides a method and device for transmitting a modulation symbol, a method and device for receiving a modulation symbol, and a communication device, which can improve the reliability and efficiency of communication.
第一方面，提供了一种发送调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：根据扩展因子L，对包括多个调制符号的调制符号序列进行扩展，其中，扩展后的调制符号序列对应K×L个调制符号，其中，L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送。In a first aspect, a method for transmitting a modulation symbol is provided, which comprises: expanding a modulation symbol sequence including a plurality of modulation symbols according to an expansion factor L, wherein the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to K × L Modulation symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; first interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence; and mapping the modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving to K × L resource units and send.
可选地，该第一交织是以调制符号为单位进行的。Optionally, the first interleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
其中，交织的“单位”可以是指交织所移位的对象。The “unit” of the interleaving may refer to an object shifted by the interleaving.
例如，在对包括多个数据的数据集合进行交织时，如果以数据组(包括多个数据)为单位，进行交织，则在交织后，仅是多个数据组之间的位置发生变化，同一数据组内的各数据在该数据组内的相对位置不发生变化。For example, when interleaving a data set that includes multiple data, if the data group (including multiple data) is used as the unit for interleaving, after interleaving, only the positions between multiple data groups change and the same The relative position of each data in the data group within the data group does not change.
相应地，如果以数据为单位进行交织，则在交织后，同一数据组的数据间的相对位置发生变化。Accordingly, if interleaving is performed in units of data, after interleaving, the relative position between the data of the same data group changes.
本申请中的调制符号序列相当于上述数据集合，调制符号相当于数据。The modulation symbol sequence in this application corresponds to the above-mentioned data set, and the modulation symbol corresponds to data.
即，“以调制符号为单位，对调制符号序列进行第一交织”可以理解为，在经过第一交织后，调制符号序列中的某些调制符号在其所属于的交织块内的位置发生变化。That is, “the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit” can be understood as that, after the first interleaving, the position of some modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence in the interleaved block to which the modulation symbol belongs is changed .
另外，“以调制符号为单位，对调制符号序列进行第一交织”也可以理解为：以调制符 号为颗粒度(或者说，粒度)，对调制符号序列进行第一交织。In addition, "the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit" can also be understood as the first interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as granularity (or granularity).
其中，一个交织块是交织器在一次交织处理所处理的数据量的大小，即，一个交织块可以包括多个数据(例如，上述调制符号)，交织器对于所输入的交织块中的数据，在该交织块的范围内进行位置变更。One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). For the data in the input interleaving block, the interleaver, The position is changed within the range of the interleaved block.
设在第一交织前，调制符号序列中存在两个相邻的调制符号(记作，调制符号#1和调制符号#2)，则在经过第一交织后，调制符号#1和调制符号#2在调制符号序列中可以不相邻。It is assumed that before the first interleaving, there are two adjacent modulation symbols (denoted as modulation symbol # 1 and modulation symbol # 2) in the modulation symbol sequence. After the first interleaving, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may not be adjacent in the modulation symbol sequence.
例如，如果未进行第一交织，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以是同一虚拟资源块(virtual resource block，VRB)中的调制符号。或者说，未进行第一交织时，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2所对应的VRB序号相同。For example, if the first interleaving is not performed, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be modulation symbols in the same virtual resource block (VRB). In other words, when the first interleaving is not performed, the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 are the same.
经过该第一交织之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以位于不同的VRB，或者说，在第一交织之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2所对应的VRB序号不同。After the first interleaving, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different VRBs. In other words, after the first interleaving, the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 are different.
或者说，经过该第一交织及资源映射之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以位于不同的物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)，或者说，在第一交织之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2所对应的PRB序号不同。In other words, after the first interleaving and resource mapping, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different physical resource blocks (PRBs), or after the first interleaving, the modulation symbol The PRB numbers corresponding to # 1 and modulation symbol # 2 are different.
再例如，在第一交织之前，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以是同一VRB集(bundle)中的调制符号。其中，一个VRB集可以包括S个VRB，该S可以为大于或等于1的整数。例如，S可以为2，即，一个VRB集可以包括2个VRB。For another example, before the first interleaving, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be modulation symbols in the same VRB bundle. A VRB set may include S VRBs, where S may be an integer greater than or equal to 1. For example, S may be 2, that is, one VRB set may include 2 VRBs.
经过该第一交织之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以位于不同的VRB集。After the first interleaving, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different VRB sets.
或者说，经过该第一交织及资源映射之后，该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以位于不同的PRB集，其中，一个PRB集可以包括S个PRB，该S可以为大于或等于1的整数。例如，S可以为2，即，一个PRB集可以包括2个PRB。In other words, after the first interleaving and resource mapping, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different PRB sets. One PRB set may include S PRBs, and the S may be greater than or equal to 1. Integer. For example, S may be 2, that is, one PRB set may include 2 PRBs.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
可选地，扩展后的调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
其中，扩展后的调制符号序列对应一个或多个OFDM符号可以理解为，扩展后的调制符号序列在时域上可以映射在一个或多个OFDM符号上。The extended modulation symbol sequence corresponding to one or more OFDM symbols can be understood as that the extended modulation symbol sequence can be mapped on one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain.
此情况下，该对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。In this case, performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
其中，该T的值为预定义的值，例如，通信***或通信协议可以规定该T的值。The value of T is a predefined value. For example, the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
或者，该T的值为网络设备确定并通过高层信令下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为1，即，发送设备可以将一个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，一个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该OFDM符号内。For example, in the present application, the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
再例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为2，即，发送设备可以将2个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的2个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该2个OFDM符号内。但是，该2个OFDM符号中的 一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#1)中的调制符号在交织后，可能位于该OFDM符号#1内，也可以位于该2个OFDM符号中的另一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#2)内，本申请并未特别限定。For another example, in the present application, the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block. The modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving. However, after interleaving, the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols. Within the OFDM symbol (denoted as OFDM symbol # 2), this application is not particularly limited.
即，当T大于或等于2时，发送设备可以将T个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的T个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该T个OFDM符号内。并且，该T个OFDM符号中的任意一个调制符号在交织后，可能位于该T个OFDM符中的任意一个OFDM符号内，本申请并未特别限定。That is, when T is greater than or equal to 2, the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols. In addition, after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，该对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：根据该扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L.
例如，该根据该扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：根据该扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，该第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，将待第一交织的调制符号填充至该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号。For example, performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: determining a first interleaving matrix according to the extension factor L. The first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer. ; Fill the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix with the modulation symbol to be interleaved first according to the column direction of the first interleaving matrix; The first interleaved modulation symbol is output in space.
并且，可选地，在按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号之前，该第一交织还包括：根据第一移位值，对该第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。In addition, optionally, before outputting the first interleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first interleaving further includes: Value, cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
从而，能够进一步提高频域分集增益。Therefore, it is possible to further increase the frequency domain diversity gain.
其中，该第一移位值可以是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，可以采用例如3GPP TS38.211中第5.2.1节所述的方法生成随机序列c(i)，其中序列的初始值c init用下面公式生成： For example, in this application, the cell identifier may be M. For example, the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i). The initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
c init＝(M+n×2 15)mod 2 31 c init = (M + n × 2 15 ) mod 2 31
其中，n是时隙编号。Where n is the slot number.
从而，第i列的循环移位值ω(i)可以表示为：Therefore, the cyclic shift value ω (i) of the i-th column can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000001
其中，V可以为
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000002
表示向上取整运算。 Where V can be
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000002
Represents the round-up operation.
通过为不同的小区配置不同的移位值，能够降低小区间干扰。By configuring different shift values for different cells, inter-cell interference can be reduced.
再例如，该根据该扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：根据以下公式对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。For another example, performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the following formula.
π(i×K+j)＝i+j×L，i＝0,…,L-1,j＝0,…,K-1π (i × K + j) = i + j × L, i = 0, ..., L-1, j = 0, ..., K-1
其中，L表示扩展因子，K表示调制符号序列包括的扩展单元的数量，i×K+j表示调制符号在交织前的位置，π(i×K+j)表示调制符号在交织后的位置，即i+j×L。Among them, L represents the spreading factor, K represents the number of expansion units included in the modulation symbol sequence, i × K + j represents the position of the modulation symbol before interleaving, and π (i × K + j) represents the position of the modulation symbol after interleaving, That is, i + j × L.
可选地，该对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；根据该第一交织序列，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and according to the first interleaving sequence, The spread modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
例如，作为示例而非限定，该交织序列可以基于以下公式确定，For example, by way of example and not limitation, the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
σ(i)＝mod(π(i)+a k,L×K)，其中，i＝0,…,L×K-1 σ (i) = mod (π (i) + ak , L × K), where i = 0, ..., L × K-1
π(i)＝mod(f 1×i 2+f 2×i,L×K) π (i) = mod (f 1 × i 2 + f 2 × i, L × K)
其中，σ(i)表示调制符号序列中的第i个调制符号在交织后的位置，L×K为调制符号序列包括的符号的数量，其中，L表示扩展因子，K表示调制符号序列包括的扩展单元的数量，f 1和f 2为预定义的参数，a k是基于上述小区标识确定的，例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，此情况下，a k可以等于M，或者等于利用M初始化的随机数(或者，也可以称为随机序列)。 Among them, σ (i) represents the position of the ith modulation symbol in the modulation symbol sequence after interleaving, and L × K is the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence, where L represents an expansion factor and K represents the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence. The number of expansion units, f 1 and f 2 are predefined parameters, and a k is determined based on the above-mentioned cell identifier. For example, the cell identifier may be M in this application. In this case, a k may be equal to M, or equal to A random number initialized with M (or, it may also be referred to as a random sequence).
例如，可以采用例如3GPP TS38.211中第5.2.1节所述的方法生成随机序列c(i)，其中序列的初始值c init用下面公式生成： For example, the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
c init＝(M+n×2 15)mod 2 31 c init = (M + n × 2 15 ) mod 2 31
其中，n是时隙编号。Where n is the slot number.
需要说明的是，该方法的执行主体(即，调制符号的发送设备)可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，本申请并未特别限定。It should be noted that the execution body of the method (that is, the sending device of the modulation symbol) may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为终端设备时，该方法还包括：接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；以及该对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织包括：根据该第一指示信息，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, when the execution subject of the method is a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct first interleaving of the extended modulation symbol sequence; And the first interleaving of the extended modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为网络设备时，该方法还包括：向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该扩展后的调制符号序列被进行了第一交织。Optionally, when the execution subject of the method is a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the extended modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved .
可选地，经过第一交织后的调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数，以及该将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送，包括：以VRB集为单位，对将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列进行第二交织；将经过第二交织后的调制符号序列中的多个VRB映射到多个虚拟资源块VRB集上并发送。Optionally, the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs, each The PRB sets include S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and transmitted, including: using the VRB set For the unit, a second interleaving is performed on the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving; a plurality of VRBs in the second interleaving modulation symbol sequence are mapped to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and transmitted.
第二方面，提供了一种接收调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：通过K×L个资源单元接收包括K×L个调制符号的调制符号序列，其中，L为扩展因子，且L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织；根据扩展因子L，对第一解交织后的调制符号序列进行解扩。In a second aspect, a method for receiving a modulation symbol is provided, including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K × L modulation symbols through K × L resource units, where L is an expansion factor, and L is An integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence; and performing a despreading on the first deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence according to an expansion factor L.
可选地，该第一解交织是以调制符号为单位进行的。Optionally, the first deinterleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
其中，解交织的“单位”可以是指解交织所移位的对象。The “unit” of deinterleaving may refer to an object that is deinterleaved.
例如，在对包括多个数据的数据集合进行解交织时，如果以数据组(包括多个数据)为单位，进行解交织，则在解交织后，仅是多个数据组之间的位置发生变化，同一数据组内的各数据在该数据组内的相对位置不发生变化。For example, when deinterleaving a data set including multiple data, if deinterleaving is performed in units of data groups (including multiple data), after deinterleaving, only positions between multiple data groups occur. Change, the relative position of each data in the same data group does not change.
相应地，如果以数据为单位进行解交织，则在解交织后，同一数据组的数据间的相对位置发生变化。Correspondingly, if deinterleaving is performed in units of data, after deinterleaving, the relative position between data of the same data group changes.
本申请中的调制符号序列相当于上述数据集合，调制符号相当于数据。The modulation symbol sequence in this application corresponds to the above-mentioned data set, and the modulation symbol corresponds to data.
即，“以调制符号为单位，对调制符号序列进行第一解交织”可以理解为，在经过第一解交织后，调制符号序列中的某些调制符号在其所属于的交织块内的位置发生变化。That is, “the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit” can be understood as the position of some modulation symbols in the modulation symbol sequence in the interleaved block to which the modulation symbol belongs after the first deinterleaving. Changed.
其中，一个交织块是交织器在一次解交织处理所处理的数据量的大小，即，一个交织 块可以包括多个数据(例如，上述调制符号)，交织器对于所输入的交织块中的数据，在该交织块的范围内进行位置变更。One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one de-interleaving process, that is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). , Change the position within the range of the interleaved block.
设在第一解交织前，调制符号序列中存在两个不相邻的调制符号(记作，调制符号#3和调制符号#4)，则在经过第一解交织后，调制符号#3和调制符号#4在调制符号序列中可以相邻。Suppose that there are two non-adjacent modulation symbols (denoted as modulation symbol # 3 and modulation symbol # 4) in the modulation symbol sequence before the first deinterleaving. After the first deinterleaving, the modulation symbols # 3 and The modulation symbol # 4 may be adjacent in the modulation symbol sequence.
例如，如果未经过第一解交织，则该调制符号#3和调制符号#4可以是不VRB中的调制符号。或者说，如果未经过第一解交织，则该调制符号#3和调制符号#4所对应的VRB序号不同。For example, if the first deinterleaving has not been performed, the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be modulation symbols in a VRB. In other words, if the first deinterleaving is not performed, the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 are different.
经过该第一解交织之后，该调制符号#3和调制符号#4可以位于相同的VRB，或者说，在第一解交织之后，该调制符号#3和调制符号#4所对应的VRB序号相同。After the first deinterleaving, the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same VRB, or after the first deinterleaving, the VRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 are the same. .
或者说，如果未经过解资源映射和该第一解交织，则该调制符号#1和调制符号#2可以位于不同的PRB，或者说，如果未经过解资源映射和该第一解交织，则该调制符号#1和调制符号#2所对应的PRB序号不同。In other words, if the de-resource mapping and the first de-interleaving are not performed, the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 may be located in different PRBs, or if the de-resource mapping and the first de-interleaving are not performed, then The PRB numbers corresponding to the modulation symbol # 1 and the modulation symbol # 2 are different.
再例如，如果未经过第一解交织，则该调制符号#3和调制符号#4可以是不同VRB集(bundle)中的调制符号。其中，一个VRB集可以包括S个VRB，该S可以为大于或等于1的整数。例如，S可以为2，即，一个VRB集可以包括2个VRB。As another example, if the first deinterleaving has not been performed, the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be modulation symbols in different VRB bundles. A VRB set may include S VRBs, where S may be an integer greater than or equal to 1. For example, S may be 2, that is, one VRB set may include 2 VRBs.
经过该第一解交织之后，该调制符号#3和调制符号#4可以位于同一VRB集。After the first deinterleaving, the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same VRB set.
或者说，在经过解资源映射和该第一解交织之后，该调制符号#3和调制符号#4可以位于同一PRB集，其中，一个PRB集可以包括S个PRB，该S可以为大于或等于1的整数。例如，S可以为2，即，一个PRB集可以包括2个PRB。In other words, after de-resource mapping and the first de-interleaving, the modulation symbol # 3 and the modulation symbol # 4 may be located in the same PRB set, where one PRB set may include S PRBs, and the S may be greater than or equal An integer of 1. For example, S may be 2, that is, one PRB set may include 2 PRBs.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
可选地，该调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
此情况下，该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一解交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。In this case, the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and performing first deinterleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
其中，所述T的值为预定义的值，例如，通信***或通信协议可以规定该T的值。The value of T is a predefined value. For example, the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
或者，所述T的值为网络设备确定并通过高层信令下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为1，即，接收设备可以将一个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次解交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，一个OFDM符号内的调制符号在解交织后仍然位于该OFDM符号内。For example, in the present application, the value of T may be 1, that is, the receiving device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in a deinterleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbol in one OFDM symbol is at It remains within the OFDM symbol after deinterleaving.
再例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为2，即，接收设备可以将2个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次解交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的2个OFDM符号内的调制符号在解交织后仍然位于该2个OFDM符号内。但是，该2个OFDM符号中的一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#3)中的调制符号在解交织后，可能位于该OFDM符号#3内，也可以位于该2个OFDM符号中的另一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#4)内，本申请并未特别限定。For another example, in this application, the value of T may be 2, that is, the receiving device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in a deinterleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block. The modulation symbols in the two OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after deinterleaving. However, the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 3) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 3 after deinterleaving, or may be located in another of the two OFDM symbols. Within one OFDM symbol (denoted as OFDM symbol # 4), this application is not particularly limited.
即，当T大于或等于2时，接收设备可以将T个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次 解交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的T个OFDM符号内的调制符号在解交织后仍然位于该T个OFDM符号内。并且，该T个OFDM符号中的任意一个调制符号在解交织后，可能位于该T个OFDM符中的任意一个OFDM符号内，本申请并未特别限定。That is, when T is greater than or equal to 2, the receiving device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in a de-interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols within the T OFDM symbols as one interleave block are in After de-interleaving, it is still located within the T OFDM symbols. In addition, after de-interleaving any one of the T OFDM symbols, the modulation symbol may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：根据该扩展因子L，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
例如，该根据该扩展因子L，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：根据该扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，该第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，将待第一解交织的调制符号填充至该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号。For example, performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L includes: determining a first interleaving matrix according to the extension factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer; Fill the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix with the modulation symbols to be first deinterleaved according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix; The first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output in space.
并且，在按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号之前，该第一解交织还包括：根据第一移位值，对该第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。In addition, before outputting the first deinterleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first deinterleaving further includes: according to the first shift value, The elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix are cyclically shifted, and the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
从而，能够进一步提高频域分集增益。Therefore, it is possible to further increase the frequency domain diversity gain.
其中，该第一移位值是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，可以采用例如3GPP TS38.211中第5.2.1节所述的方法生成随机序列c(i)，其中序列的初始值c init用下面公式生成： For example, in this application, the cell identifier may be M. For example, the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
c init＝(M+n×2 15)mod 2 31 c init = (M + n × 2 15 ) mod 2 31
其中，n是时隙编号。Where n is the slot number.
从而，第i列的循环移位值ω(i)可以表示为：Therefore, the cyclic shift value ω (i) of the i-th column can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000003
其中，V可以为
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000004
表示向上取整运算。 Where V can be
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000004
Represents the round-up operation.
通过为不同的小区配置不同的移位值，能够降低小区间干扰。By configuring different shift values for different cells, inter-cell interference can be reduced.
再例如，该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：根据以下公式，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。For another example, performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the following formula.
μ(i+j×L)＝i×K+j，i＝0,…,L-1,j＝0,…,K-1μ (i + j × L) = i × K + j, i = 0, ..., L-1, j = 0, ..., K-1
其中，L表示扩展因子，K表示调制符号序列包括的扩展单元的数量，i+j×L表示调制符号在解交织前的位置，μ(i+j×L)表示调制符号在解交织后的位置，即i×K+j。Among them, L represents the spreading factor, K represents the number of expansion units included in the modulation symbol sequence, i + j × L represents the position of the modulation symbol before deinterleaving, and μ (i + j × L) represents the modulation symbol after deinterleaving. Position, i × K + j.
可选地，该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；根据该第一交织序列，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, the first de-interleaving the modulation symbol sequence includes: determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and according to the first interleaving sequence, The modulation symbol sequence is first deinterleaved.
例如，作为示例而非限定，该交织序列可以基于以下公式确定，For example, by way of example and not limitation, the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
σ(i)＝mod(π(i)+a k,L×K)，其中，i＝0,…,L×K-1 σ (i) = mod (π (i) + ak , L × K), where i = 0, ..., L × K-1
π(i)＝mod(f 1×i 2+f 2×i,L×K) π (i) = mod (f 1 × i 2 + f 2 × i, L × K)
其中，σ(i)表示调制符号序列中的第i个调制符号在交织后的位置，L×K为调制符号序列包括的符号的数量，其中，L表示扩展因子，K表示调制符号序列包括的扩展单元 的数量，f 1和f 2为预定义的参数，a k是基于上述小区标识确定的，例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，此情况下，a k可以等于M，或者等于利用M初始化的随机数(或者，也可以称为随机序列)。 Among them, σ (i) represents the position of the ith modulation symbol in the modulation symbol sequence after interleaving, and L × K is the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence, where L represents an expansion factor and K represents the number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence. The number of expansion units, f 1 and f 2 are predefined parameters, and a k is determined based on the above-mentioned cell identifier. For example, the cell identifier may be M in this application. In this case, a k may be equal to M, or equal to A random number initialized with M (or, it may also be referred to as a random sequence).
需要说明的是，该方法的执行主体(即，调制符号的发送设备)可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，本申请并未特别限定。It should be noted that the execution body of the method (that is, the sending device of the modulation symbol) may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为终端设备时，该方法还包括：接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示对调制符号序列进行第一解交织；以及该对调制符号序列进行第一解交织包括：根据该第一指示信息指示，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, when the execution subject of the method is a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence; and Performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为网络设备时，该方法还包括：向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示调制符号序列在被映射在资源单元之前需要被第一交织。Optionally, when the execution subject of the method is a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence needs to be One intertwined.
可选地，该调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数，以及在对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织之前，该方法还包括：以VRB集为单位，对该调制符号序列进行第二交织；该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：对经过该第二解交织后的调制符号序列，进行第一解交织。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and before performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence, the method further includes: performing a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence using the VRB set as a unit; The first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
第三方面，提供一种发送调制符号的方法，包括：根据扩展因子L，对多个调制符号序列中的每个调制符号序列进行扩展，其中，扩展后的调制符号序列包括K×L个调制符号，其中，L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数，所述多个调制符号序列与多个传输层一一对应；对扩展后的多个调制符号序列中的每个调制符号序列分别进行调整，所述调整包括功率调整和/或相位调制；对调整后的多个调制符号序列进行预处理，所述预处理包括叠加和/或预编码；对预处理后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送。According to a third aspect, a method for transmitting a modulation symbol is provided, including: expanding each modulation symbol sequence in a plurality of modulation symbol sequences according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K × L modulations Symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the multiple modulation symbol sequences correspond one-to-one with multiple transmission layers; each of the extended multiple modulation symbol sequences is modulated The symbol sequence is adjusted separately, the adjustment includes power adjustment and / or phase modulation; pre-processing of the adjusted multiple modulation symbol sequences, the pre-processing includes superposition and / or pre-coding; and the pre-modulated modulation symbols The sequence is first interleaved; the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and transmitted.
第四方面，提供一种发送调制符号的方法，包括：根据扩展因子L，对多个传输层的调制符号序列中的每个调制符号序列进行扩展，其中，扩展后的调制符号序列包括K×L个调制符号，其中，L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数，所述多个调制符号序列与多个传输层一一对应；对扩展后的多个调制符号序列中的每个调制符号序列分别进行调整，所述调整包括功率调整和/或相位调制；对调整后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；对第一交织后的多个调制符号序列进行预处理，所述预处理包括叠加和/或预编码；将预处理后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送。According to a fourth aspect, a method for transmitting a modulation symbol is provided, including: spreading each modulation symbol sequence in a plurality of transmission layer modulation symbol sequences according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K × L modulation symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the plurality of modulation symbol sequences correspond one-to-one with a plurality of transmission layers; Each modulation symbol sequence is adjusted separately, the adjustment includes power adjustment and / or phase modulation; performing a first interleaving on the adjusted modulation symbol sequence; and pre-processing a plurality of modulation symbol sequences after the first interleaving, said The pre-processing includes superposition and / or pre-coding; the modulation symbols in the pre-processed modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and sent.
可选地，该第一交织是以调制符号为单位进行的。Optionally, the first interleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
可选地，作为所述第一交织的处理对象的调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence as the processing target of the first interleaving corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
此情况下，所述第一交织为以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块的交织，T为大于或 等于1的整数。In this case, the first interleaving is an interleaving using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
其中，该T的值为预定义的值，例如，通信***或通信协议可以规定该T的值。The value of T is a predefined value. For example, the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
或者，该T的值为网络设备确定并通过高层信令下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为1，即，发送设备可以将一个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，一个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该OFDM符号内。For example, in the present application, the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
再例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为2，即，发送设备可以将2个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的2个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该2个OFDM符号内。但是，该2个OFDM符号中的一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#1)中的调制符号在交织后，可能位于该OFDM符号#1内，也可以位于该2个OFDM符号中的另一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#2)内，本申请并未特别限定。For another example, in the present application, the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block. The modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving. However, after interleaving, the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols. Within the OFDM symbol (denoted as OFDM symbol # 2), this application is not particularly limited.
即，当T大于或等于2时，发送设备可以将T个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的T个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该T个OFDM符号内。并且，该T个OFDM符号中的任意一个调制符号在交织后，可能位于该T个OFDM符中的任意一个OFDM符号内，本申请并未特别限定。That is, when T is greater than or equal to 2, the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleaving block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols. In addition, after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，该第一交织为基于该扩展因子L的交织。Optionally, the first interlace is an interlace based on the spreading factor L.
例如，可以根据该扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，该第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，将待第一交织的调制符号填充至该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号。For example, a first interleaving matrix may be determined according to the expansion factor L. The first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, where N is a positive integer; and according to a column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the modulation symbols to be interleaved by the first are filled. To the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix; and outputting the first interleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix.
并且，可选地，在按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号之前，该第一交织还可以包括：根据第一移位值，对该第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。In addition, optionally, before outputting the first interleaved modulation symbol from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first interleaving may further include: Bit value, cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
从而，能够进一步提高频域分集增益。Therefore, it is possible to further increase the frequency domain diversity gain.
其中，该第一移位值可以是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
通过为不同的小区配置不同的移位值，能够降低小区间干扰。By configuring different shift values for different cells, inter-cell interference can be reduced.
可选地，该第一交织可以包括基于第一交织序列的交织，该第一交织序列是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。Optionally, the first interleaving may include interleaving based on a first interleaving sequence, where the first interleaving sequence is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
例如，作为示例而非限定，该交织序列可以基于以下公式确定，For example, by way of example and not limitation, the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
σ(i)＝mod(π(i)+a k,L×K)，其中，i＝0,…,L×K-1 σ (i) = mod (π (i) + ak , L × K), where i = 0, ..., L × K-1
π(i)＝mod(f 1×i 2+f 2×i,L×K) π (i) = mod (f 1 × i 2 + f 2 × i, L × K)
需要说明的是，该方法的执行主体(即，调制符号的发送设备)可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，本申请并未特别限定。It should be noted that the execution body of the method (that is, the sending device of the modulation symbol) may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为终端设备时，该方法还包括：接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, when the method is performed by a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
或者说，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备以调制符号为单位对调制符号序列进行交织。In other words, the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to interleave a modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为网络设备时，该方法还包括：向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该调制符号序列被进行了第一交织。Optionally, when the method is performed by a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
或者说，该第二指示信息用于指示网络设备发送的调制符号序列被以调制符号为单位进行了交织。In other words, the second indication information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence sent by the network device is interleaved in units of modulation symbols.
可选地，经过第一交织后的调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数，以及该将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送，包括：以VRB集为单位，对将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列进行第二交织；将经过第二交织后的调制符号序列中的多个VRB映射到多个虚拟资源块VRB集上并发送。Optionally, the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs, each The PRB sets include S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and transmitted, including: using the VRB set For the unit, a second interleaving is performed on the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving; a plurality of VRBs in the second interleaving modulation symbol sequence are mapped to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and transmitted.
第五方面，提供了一种接收调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：通过K×L个资源单元接收包括K×L个调制符号的调制符号序列，其中，L为扩展因子，且L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数，所述调制符号序列是由所述多个传输层对应的调制符号序列经预处理而生成的，所述预处理包括叠加或预编码；对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织；根据经过第一解交织后的调制符号序列，确定所述多个传输层中的第一传输层对应的调制符号序列，所述第一传输层是所述多个传输层中的任意一个传输层；根据扩展因子L，对所述第一传输层对应的调制符号序进行解扩。According to a fifth aspect, a method for receiving a modulation symbol is provided, including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K × L modulation symbols through K × L resource units, where L is an expansion factor and L is An integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the modulation symbol sequence is generated by preprocessing the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers, and the preprocessing includes superposition or precoding; The modulation symbol sequence is first deinterleaved; and according to the modulation symbol sequence after the first deinterleaving, a modulation symbol sequence corresponding to a first transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers is determined, where the first transmission layer is the Any one of a plurality of transmission layers; and according to an expansion factor L, the modulation symbol sequence corresponding to the first transmission layer is despread.
第六方面，提供了一种接收调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：通过K×L个资源单元接收包括K×L个调制符号的调制符号序列，其中，L为扩展因子，且L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数，所述调制符号序列是由所述多个传输层对应的调制符号经预处理而生成的，所述预处理包括叠加或预编码；根据所述调制符号序列，确定所述多个传输层中的第一传输层对应的调制符号序列，所述第一传输层是所述多个传输层中的任意一个传输层；对所述第一传输层对应的调制符号序列进行第一解交织；根据扩展因子L，对经过所述第一解交织后的调制符号序列进行解扩。According to a sixth aspect, a method for receiving a modulation symbol is provided, including: receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K × L modulation symbols through K × L resource units, where L is an expansion factor and L is An integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, the modulation symbol sequence is generated by preprocessing the modulation symbols corresponding to the multiple transmission layers, and the preprocessing includes superposition or precoding; The modulation symbol sequence determines a modulation symbol sequence corresponding to a first transmission layer in the plurality of transmission layers, where the first transmission layer is any one of the plurality of transmission layers; for the first transmission, The modulation symbol sequence corresponding to the layer is first deinterleaved; and the modulation symbol sequence after the first deinterleaving is despread according to the expansion factor L.
可选地，该第一解交织是以调制符号为单位进行的。Optionally, the first deinterleaving is performed in units of modulation symbols.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
可选地，作为第一解交织的处理对象的调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence that is the processing object of the first deinterleaving corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
此情况下，所述第一解交织为以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块的交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。In this case, the first deinterleaving is interleaving using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
其中，该T的值为预定义的值，例如，通信***或通信协议可以规定该T的值。The value of T is a predefined value. For example, the communication system or communication protocol may specify the value of T.
或者，该T的值为网络设备确定并通过高层信令下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of T is determined by the network device and is delivered to the terminal device through high-level signaling.
例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为1，即，发送设备可以将一个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，一个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该OFDM符号内。For example, in the present application, the value of T may be 1, that is, the transmitting device may use one OFDM symbol as an input of an interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, the modulation symbols in one OFDM symbol are interleaved. Is still located within the OFDM symbol.
再例如，在本申请中，该T的值可以为2，即，发送设备可以将2个OFDM符号作 为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的2个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该2个OFDM符号内。但是，该2个OFDM符号中的一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#1)中的调制符号在交织后，可能位于该OFDM符号#1内，也可以位于该2个OFDM符号中的另一个OFDM符号(记作，OFDM符号#2)内，本申请并未特别限定。For another example, in the present application, the value of T may be 2, that is, the transmitting device may use 2 OFDM symbols as an input of an interleaver in an interleaving process, that is, in this case, 2 as an interleaved block. The modulation symbols in the OFDM symbols are still located in the two OFDM symbols after interleaving. However, after interleaving, the modulation symbol in one of the two OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1) may be located in the OFDM symbol # 1, or may be located in the other of the two OFDM symbols. Within the OFDM symbol (denoted as OFDM symbol # 2), this application is not particularly limited.
即，当T大于或等于2时，发送设备可以将T个OFDM符号作为一个交织器在一次交织处理的输入，即，此情况下，作为一个交织块的T个OFDM符号内的调制符号在交织后仍然位于该T个OFDM符号内。并且，该T个OFDM符号中的任意一个调制符号在交织后，可能位于该T个OFDM符中的任意一个OFDM符号内，本申请并未特别限定。That is, when T is greater than or equal to 2, the transmitting device may use T OFDM symbols as input for one interleaver in one interleaving process, that is, in this case, modulation symbols within T OFDM symbols that are one interleave block are interleaved. Is still located within the T OFDM symbols. In addition, after any one of the T OFDM symbols is interleaved, it may be located in any one of the T OFDM symbols, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，该第一解交织为基于该扩展因子L的交织。Optionally, the first deinterleaving is an interleaving based on the spreading factor L.
例如，可以根据该扩展因子L，确定第一解交织矩阵，该第一解交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；按照该第一解交织矩阵的列方向，将待第一解交织的调制符号填充至该第一解交织矩阵对应的存储空间；按照该第一解交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一解交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号。For example, a first deinterleaving matrix may be determined according to the expansion factor L. The first deinterleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer. According to the column direction of the first deinterleaving matrix, the first deinterleaving matrix is to be deinterleaved. The modulation symbols are filled into the storage space corresponding to the first deinterleaving matrix. According to the row direction of the first deinterleaving matrix, the first deinterleaved modulation symbols are output from the storage space corresponding to the first deinterleaving matrix.
并且，可选地，在按照该第一解交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一解交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号之前，该第一解交织还可以包括：根据第一移位值，对该第一解交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一解交织矩阵中的任意一列。In addition, optionally, before the first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output from the storage space corresponding to the first deinterleaved matrix according to the row direction of the first deinterleaved matrix, the first deinterleaved may further include: According to the first shift value, the elements in the i-th column of the first de-interleaving matrix are cyclically shifted, and the i-th column is any one of the first de-interleaving matrix.
从而，能够进一步提高频域分集增益。Therefore, it is possible to further increase the frequency domain diversity gain.
其中，该第一移位值可以是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The first shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
通过为不同的小区配置不同的移位值，能够降低小区间干扰。By configuring different shift values for different cells, inter-cell interference can be reduced.
可选地，该第一解交织可以包括基于第一解交织序列的交织，该第一解交织序列是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。Optionally, the first deinterleaving may include interleaving based on a first deinterleaving sequence, and the first deinterleaving sequence is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
例如，作为示例而非限定，该交织序列可以基于以下公式确定，For example, by way of example and not limitation, the interleaved sequence can be determined based on the following formula,
σ(i)＝mod(π(i)+a k,L×K)，其中，i＝0,…,L×K-1 σ (i) = mod (π (i) + ak , L × K), where i = 0, ..., L × K-1
π(i)＝mod(f 1×i 2+f 2×i,L×K) π (i) = mod (f 1 × i 2 + f 2 × i, L × K)
需要说明的是，该方法的执行主体(即，调制符号的发送设备)可以是终端设备，也可以是网络设备，本申请并未特别限定。It should be noted that the execution body of the method (that is, the sending device of the modulation symbol) may be a terminal device or a network device, which is not particularly limited in this application.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为终端设备时，该方法还包括：接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备对调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, when the method is performed by a terminal device, the method further includes: receiving first instruction information sent by the network device, where the first instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
或者说，该第一指示信息用于指示终端设备以调制符号为单位对调制符号序列进行解交织。In other words, the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to deinterleave a modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
可选地，当该方法的执行主体为网络设备时，该方法还包括：向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备对调制符号序列被进行第一解交织。Optionally, when the method is performed by a network device, the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to instruct the terminal device to perform the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence.
或者说，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备以调制符号为单位对调制符号序列进行解交织。In other words, the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
可选地，该调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S 为大于或等于1的整数，以及在对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织之前，该方法还包括：以VRB集为单位，对该调制符号序列进行第二交织；该对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：对经过该第二解交织后的调制符号序列，进行第一解交织。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and before performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence, the method further includes: performing a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence using the VRB set as a unit; The first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence includes: performing the first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行上述第一方面至第六方面中的任一方面及其各实现方式中的方法的各步骤的单元。According to a seventh aspect, there is provided a communication device including a unit for performing each step of the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects and the implementation methods thereof.
在一种设计中，该通信装置为通信芯片，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。In one design, the communication device is a communication chip. The communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for transmitting information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
在另一种设计中，所述通信装置为通信设备(例如，终端设备或网络设备)，通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的发射机，以及用于接收信息或数据的接收机。In another design, the communication device is a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for transmitting information or data, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
第八方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该终端设备执行第一方面至第六方面中任意方面及其可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory. The processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the terminal device executes any one of the first to sixth aspects and its possible Method in implementation.
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
在具体实现过程中，处理器可用于进行，例如但不限于，基带相关处理，接收器和发射器可分别用于进行，例如但不限于，射频收发。上述器件可以分别设置在彼此独立的芯片上，也可以至少部分的或者全部的设置在同一块芯片上，例如，接收器和发射器可以设置在彼此独立的接收器芯片和发射器芯片上，也可以整合为收发器继而设置在收发器芯片上。又例如，处理器可以进一步划分为模拟基带处理器和数字基带处理器，其中模拟基带处理器可以与收发器集成在同一块芯片上，数字基带处理器可以设置在独立的芯片上。随着集成电路技术的不断发展，可以在同一块芯片上集成的器件越来越多，例如，数字基带处理器可以与多种应用处理器(例如但不限于图形处理器，多媒体处理器等)集成在同一块芯片之上。这样的芯片可以称为***芯片(system on chip)。将各个器件独立设置在不同的芯片上，还是整合设置在一个或者多个芯片上，往往取决于产品设计的具体需要。本申请实施例对上述器件的具体实现形式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing, and the receiver and the transmitter may be respectively used to perform, such as, but not limited to, radio frequency transceiver. The above devices may be provided on separate chips, or at least partly or entirely on the same chip. For example, the receiver and the transmitter may be provided on the receiver chip and the transmitter chip which are independent of each other. It can be integrated into a transceiver and then set on the transceiver chip. As another example, the processor may be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor. The analog baseband processor and the transceiver may be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor may be provided on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip. For example, digital baseband processors can be used with multiple application processors (such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip. Such a chip may be referred to as a system chip. Whether each device is independently set on a different chip or integrated on one or more chips depends on the specific needs of the product design. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the above device.
第九方面，提供一种处理器，包括：输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号，并通过所述输出电路发射信号，使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a ninth aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. Method.
在具体实现过程中，上述处理器可以为芯片，输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路，该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor may be a chip, an input circuit may be an input pin, an output circuit may be an output pin, and a processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.
第十方面，提供一种处理装置，包括：存储器和处理器。所述处理器用于读取所述存储器中存储的指令，并可通过接收器接收信号，通过发射器发射信号，以执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a tenth aspect, a processing device is provided, including: a memory and a processor. The processor is configured to read an instruction stored in the memory, and can receive a signal through a receiver and transmit a signal through a transmitter to execute any one of the first to sixth aspects and the first to sixth aspects. Method in implementation.
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
在具体实现过程中，存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器，例如只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.
第十一方面，提供了一种芯片，包括处理器和存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，该计算机程序用于实现第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to an eleventh aspect, a chip is provided, including a processor and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, and the computer program is used to implement the first aspect to the first. The method in the six aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to sixth aspects.
第十二方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当所述计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
第十三方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a thirteenth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, where the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions) that when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, and the reliability and efficiency of communication can be improved.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是本申请的通信***的示意性架构图。FIG. 1 is a schematic architecture diagram of a communication system of the present application.
图2是本申请的发送设备和接收设备的构成的一例的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
图3是本申请的发送设备和接收设备的构成的另一例的示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another example of the configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
图4是本申请的发送设备和接收设备的构成的再一例的示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
图5是本申请的发送设备和接收设备的构成的再一例的示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a transmitting device and a receiving device of the present application.
图6是本申请的时频资源的划分方式的一例的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a division manner of time-frequency resources in the present application.
图7是SCMA技术的一例的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of the SCMA technology.
图8是MUSA技术的一例的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an example of the MUSA technology.
图9是本申请的发送调制符号的方法的一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图10是本申请的扩展方式的一例的示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of an extension method of the present application.
图11是本申请的扩展方式的另一例的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of the expansion method of the present application.
图12是本申请的扩展方式的再一例的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of still another example of the expansion method of the present application.
图13是本申请的交织块的一例的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of an interleaved block of the present application.
图14是本申请的交织块的另一例的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another example of the interleaved block of the present application.
图15是本申请的RB为单位的交织的一例的示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an example of interleaving in units of RBs of the present application.
图16是本申请的接收调制符号的方法的一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图17是本申请的发送调制符号的方法的另一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图18是本申请的接收调制符号的方法的另一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图19是本申请的发送调制符号的方法的再一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of still another example of a method for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图20是本申请的接收调制符号的方法的再一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of still another example of a method for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图21是本申请的发送调制符号的装置的一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 21 is a schematic flowchart of an example of an apparatus for transmitting a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图22是本申请的接收调制符号的装置的一例的示意性流程图。22 is a schematic flowchart of an example of an apparatus for receiving a modulation symbol according to the present application.
图23是本申请的终端设备的一例的示意性结构图。FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram of an example of a terminal device of the present application.
图24是本申请的网络设备的一例的示意性结构图。FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of a network device of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信***，例如：全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications，GSM)***、码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)***、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)***、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)***、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)***、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信***(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信***、未来的第五代(5th generation，5G)***或新无线(new radio，NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, a global mobile communication (GSM) system, a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, and a broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, 5th generation in the future, 5G) system or new radio (NR).
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or User device. Terminal equipment can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in future 5G networks, or public land mobile networks (PLMN) in future evolution Terminal equipment and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
作为示例而非限定，在本发明实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。By way of example and not limitation, in this embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.
此外，在本发明实施例中，终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things，IoT)***中的终端设备，IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分，其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接，从而实现人机互连，物物互连的智能化网络。In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system. The IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and internet of things.
在本发明实施例中，IOT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术，做到海量连接，深度覆盖，终端省电。例如，NB只包括一个资源块(resource bloc，RB)，即， NB的带宽只有180KB。要做到海量接入，必须要求终端在接入上是离散的，根据本发明实施例的通信方法，能够有效解决IOT技术海量终端在通过NB接入网络时的拥塞问题。In the embodiment of the present invention, the IOT technology can implement, for example, a narrowband NB technology to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving. For example, the NB includes only one resource block (RBb), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB. To achieve mass access, the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备可以是全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications，GSM)***或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)***中的基站(node B，NB)，还可以是LTE***中的演进型基站(evolved node B，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point，AP),可以是新型无线***(new radio，NR)***中的gNB本申请实施例并不限定。The network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device. The network device may be a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) system or a code division multiple access (CDMA) system. The base station (base transceiver, station, or BTS) can also be a base station (node B, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station in an LTE system ( evolved node (B, eNB or eNodeB), or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device may be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device And network equipment in the future 5G network or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., can be access points (AP) in WLAN, or gNB in new radio (NR) systems The embodiments of the present application are not limited.
另外，在本发明实施例中，接入网设备为小区提供服务，终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，频域资源，或者说，频谱资源)与接入网设备进行通信，该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, an access network device provides services to a cell, and a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell. It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell. The small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
此外，LTE***或5G***中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作，在某些特殊场景下，也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如在载波聚合(carrier aggregation，CA)场景下，当为UE配置辅载波时，会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell indentification，Cell ID)，在这种情况下，可以认为载波与小区的概念等同，比如UE接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。In addition, multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time. In some special scenarios, the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, when a secondary carrier is configured for the UE, it will carry both the carrier index of the secondary carrier and the cell identification (Cell ID) of the secondary cell operating on the secondary carrier. In this case, it can be considered that the concept of a carrier is the same as a cell. For example, a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.
核心网设备可以与多个接入网设备连接，用于控制接入网设备，并且，可以将从网络侧(例如，互联网)接收到的数据分发至接入网设备。The core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling the access network device, and may distribute data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.
其中，以上列举的终端设备、接入网设备和核心网设备的功能和具体实现方式仅为示例性说明，本发明并未限定于此。The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
在本申请实施例中，终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作***层，以及运行在操作***层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作***可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作***，例如，Linux操作***、Unix操作***、Android操作***、iOS操作***或windows操作***等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. This hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system. This application layer contains applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the application can be run to provide the program according to the embodiment of the application. The communication may be performed by using the method described above. For example, the method execution subject provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module in the terminal device or the network device that can call a program and execute the program.
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软 盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.
图1是能够适用本发明实施例通信方法的***100的示意图。如图1所示，该***100包括接入网设备102，接入网设备102可包括1个天线或多个天线例如，天线104、106、108、110、112和114。另外，接入网设备102可附加地包括发射机链和接收机链，本领域普通技术人员可以理解，它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system 100 to which a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention can be applied. As shown in FIG. 1, the system 100 includes an access network device 102, and the access network device 102 may include one antenna or multiple antennas, for example, antennas 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, and 114. In addition, the access network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that each of them can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, Router, demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
接入网设备102可以与多个终端设备(例如终端设备116和终端设备122)通信。然而，可以理解，接入网设备102可以与类似于终端设备116或终端设备122的任意数目的终端设备通信。终端设备116和122可以是例如蜂窝电话、智能电话、便携式电脑、手持通信设备、手持计算设备、卫星无线电装置、全球定位***、PDA和/或用于在无线通信***100上通信的任意其它适合设备。The access network device 102 may communicate with multiple terminal devices (such as the terminal device 116 and the terminal device 122). However, it can be understood that the access network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to the terminal device 116 or the terminal device 122. The terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular phones, smartphones, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and / or any other suitable devices for communicating on the wireless communication system 100. device.
如图1所示，终端设备116与天线112和114通信，其中天线112和114通过前向链路(也称为下行链路)118向终端设备116发送信息，并通过反向链路(也称为上行链路)120从终端设备116接收信息。此外，终端设备122与天线104和106通信，其中天线104和106通过前向链路124向终端设备122发送信息，并通过反向链路126从终端设备122接收信息。As shown in FIG. 1, the terminal device 116 communicates with the antennas 112 and 114, where the antennas 112 and 114 send information to the terminal device 116 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink) 118 and through the reverse link (also (Referred to as the uplink) 120 receives information from the terminal device 116. In addition, the terminal device 122 communicates with the antennas 104 and 106, where the antennas 104 and 106 send information to the terminal device 122 through the forward link 124 and receive information from the terminal device 122 through the reverse link 126.
例如，在频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)***中，例如，前向链路118可与反向链路120使用不同的频带，前向链路124可与反向链路126使用不同的频带。For example, in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, for example, forward link 118 may use a different frequency band from reverse link 120, and forward link 124 may use a different frequency band than reverse link 126. The frequency band.
再例如，在时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)***和全双工(full duplex)***中，前向链路118和反向链路120可使用共同频带，前向链路124和反向链路126可使用共同频带。As another example, in a time division duplex (TDD) system and a full duplex system, the forward link 118 and the reverse link 120 may use a common frequency band, and the forward link 124 and the reverse link The link 126 may use a common frequency band.
被设计用于通信的每个天线(或者由多个天线组成的天线组)和/或区域称为接入网设备102的扇区。例如，可将天线组设计为与接入网设备102覆盖区域的扇区中的终端设备通信。接入网设备可以通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向其对应的扇区内所有的终端设备发送信号。在接入网设备102通过前向链路118和124分别与终端设备116和122进行通信的过程中，接入网设备102的发射天线也可利用波束成形来改善前向链路118和124的信噪比。此外，与接入网设备通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向它所有的终端设备发送信号的方式相比，在接入网设备102利用波束成形向相关覆盖区域中随机分散的终端设备116和122发送信号时，相邻小区中的移动设备会受到较少的干扰。Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the access network device 102. For example, the antenna group may be designed to communicate with terminal devices in a sector covered by the access network device 102. An access network device can send signals to all terminal devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity. In the process that the access network device 102 communicates with the terminal devices 116 and 122 through the forward links 118 and 124, respectively, the transmitting antenna of the access network device 102 can also use beamforming to improve the forward link 118 and 124. Signal to noise ratio. In addition, compared to the way in which the access network device sends signals to all of its terminal devices through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity, the access network device 102 uses beamforming to randomly scattered terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area. When transmitting signals, mobile devices in adjacent cells experience less interference.
在给定时间，接入网设备102、终端设备116或终端设备122可以是无线通信发送装置和/或无线通信接收装置。当发送数据时，无线通信发送装置可对数据进行编码以用于传输。具体地，无线通信发送装置可获取(例如生成、从其它通信装置接收、或在存储器中保存等)要通过信道发送至无线通信接收装置的一定数目的数据比特。这种数据比特可包含在数据的传输块(或多个传输块)中，传输块可被分段以产生多个码块。At a given time, the access network device 102, the terminal device 116, or the terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication sending device and / or a wireless communication receiving device. When transmitting data, the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission. Specifically, the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel. Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate a plurality of code blocks.
此外，该通信***100可以是PLMN网络、D2D网络、M2M网络、IoT网络或者其 他网络，图1只是举例的简化示意图，网络中还可以包括其他接入网设备，图1中未予以画出。In addition, the communication system 100 may be a PLMN network, a D2D network, an M2M network, an IoT network, or other networks. FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example. The network may also include other access network devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
本申请的方案可以应用于两个通信设备(例如，一个发送设备和一个接收设备)之间的通信过程。The solution of the present application can be applied to a communication process between two communication devices (for example, a transmitting device and a receiving device).
或者，本申请的方案也可以应用于多个(例如，三个或三个以上)通信设备之间的通信过程。Alternatively, the solution of the present application may also be applied to a communication process between multiple (for example, three or more) communication devices.
例如，如图2所示，在本申请中，信号或数据的发送设备(以下，简称发送设备)可以是终端设备，信号或数据的接收设备(以下，简称接收设备)可以是网络设备。具体地说，网络设备#1、终端设备#1、终端设备#2和终端设备#3组成一个单小区通信***。并且，例如，终端设备#1、终端设备#2和终端设备#3可以分别作为本申请中的发送设备可以同时发送上行数据给作为本申请中的接收设备的网络设备#1。For example, as shown in FIG. 2, in this application, a signal or data transmitting device (hereinafter, referred to as a transmitting device) may be a terminal device, and a signal or data receiving device (hereinafter, referred to as a receiving device) may be a network device. Specifically, the network device # 1, the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 constitute a single-cell communication system. And, for example, the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 may respectively serve as sending devices in the present application and may simultaneously send uplink data to the network device # 1 serving as the receiving device in the present application.
再例如，如图3所示，在本申请中，发送设备可以是网络设备，接收设备可以是终端设备。具体地说，网络设备#1、网络设备#2、终端设备#/1和终端设备#2组成一个多小区通信***。并且，例如，终端设备#1可以位于网络设备#1的小区，从而，网络设备#1可以分别作为本申请中的发送设备可以发送下行数据给作为本申请中的接收设备的终端设备#/1。再例如，终端设备#2可以位于网络设备#2的小区，从而，网络设备#2可以分别作为本申请中的发送设备可以发送下行数据给作为本申请中的接收设备的终端设备#/2。并且，网络设备#1和网络设备#2的下行数据发送过程可以同时进行。As another example, as shown in FIG. 3, in this application, the sending device may be a network device, and the receiving device may be a terminal device. Specifically, the network device # 1, the network device # 2, the terminal device # / 1, and the terminal device # 2 constitute a multi-cell communication system. In addition, for example, the terminal device # 1 may be located in a cell of the network device # 1. Therefore, the network device # 1 may respectively serve as a sending device in this application and may send downlink data to the terminal device # / 1 as a receiving device in this application . As another example, the terminal device # 2 may be located in a cell of the network device # 2. Therefore, the network device # 2 may serve as a sending device in this application, and may send downlink data to the terminal device # / 2 serving as a receiving device in this application. In addition, the downlink data sending process of network device # 1 and network device # 2 may be performed simultaneously.
再例如，如图4所示，在本申请中，发送设备可以是终端设备，接收设备可以是终端设备。具体地说，终端设备#1、终端设备#2和终端设备#3组成D2D通信***。并且，例如，终端设备#1和终端设备#2可以分别作为本申请中的发送设备可以同时发送数据给作为本申请中的接收设备的终端设备#3。As another example, as shown in FIG. 4, in this application, the sending device may be a terminal device, and the receiving device may be a terminal device. Specifically, the terminal device # 1, the terminal device # 2, and the terminal device # 3 constitute a D2D communication system. And, for example, the terminal device # 1 and the terminal device # 2 may respectively serve as the sending device in this application and may simultaneously send data to the terminal device # 3 as the receiving device in this application.
再例如，如图5所示，在本申请中，发送设备可以是终端设备和网络设备，接收设备可以是终端设备。具体地说，网络设备#1、终端设备#1和终端设备#2组成一个单小区通信***。并且，例如，网络设备#1和终端设备#1可以分别作为本申请中的发送设备可以同时发送数据给作为本申请中的接收设备的终端设备#2。As another example, as shown in FIG. 5, in this application, the sending device may be a terminal device and a network device, and the receiving device may be a terminal device. Specifically, the network device # 1, the terminal device # 1, and the terminal device # 2 constitute a single-cell communication system. And, for example, the network device # 1 and the terminal device # 1 may serve as sending devices in this application, and may simultaneously send data to the terminal device # 2 serving as a receiving device in this application.
在本申请中，上述“同时发送数据”可以理解为：不同发送设备使用同一时频资源发送数据。或者，同一发送设备可以通过同一时频资源向不同的接收设备发送数据。In the present application, the above “sending data simultaneously” can be understood as: different sending devices use the same time-frequency resource to send data. Alternatively, the same sending device may send data to different receiving devices through the same time-frequency resource.
图6示出了本申请的时频资源的划分方式的一例，如图6所示，无线资源在频域上划分为多个子载波(Subcarrier)，在时域上划分为多个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号，组成时频资源栅格。在一种实施例中，如图6所示，频域上连续12个子载波组成一个资源块(resource block，RB)。当采用常规循环前缀(normal cyclic prefix,NCP)时，时域上14个连续的OFDM符号组成一个时隙(slot)。当子载波间隔(subcarrier space，SCS)为例如，15kHz时，一个时隙的时域长度为1ms。每个资源单元(resource element，RE)对应频域一个子载波和时域一个OFDM符号。可以理解的是，RB和slot的大小还可以有其它的规格，本申请不做限定。FIG. 6 shows an example of a division method of time-frequency resources in the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the wireless resources are divided into multiple subcarriers in the frequency domain, and are divided into multiple orthogonal frequency divisions in the time domain. Multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbols form a time-frequency resource grid. In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain form a resource block (RB). When a normal cyclic prefix (NCP) is used, 14 consecutive OFDM symbols in the time domain form a slot. When the subcarrier space (SCS) is, for example, 15 kHz, the time domain length of a time slot is 1 ms. Each resource element (resource element) corresponds to one subcarrier in the frequency domain and one OFDM symbol in the time domain. It can be understood that the sizes of the RB and the slot may also have other specifications, which are not limited in this application.
另外，在本申请中，可采用例如，正交频分复用多址接入(frequency division multiple access，FDMA)、时分多址接入(time division multiple access，TDMA)、码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)，正交频分复用多址接入(orthogonal frequency  division multiplex access，OFDMA)或非正交多址接入(non-orthogonal multiple access,NOMA)等方式。In addition, in this application, for example, orthogonal frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), and code division multiple access can be used. (code multiple access, CDMA), orthogonal frequency division multiplex multiple access (OFDMA), or non-orthogonal multiple access (NOMA).
NOMA技术通过使多个终端设备使用相同的时频资源传输数据以提升***容量。一种常见的NOMA方案是发送设备的发送信号在功率域叠加，接收设备采用干扰消除算法消除UE之间的干扰。NOMA technology improves system capacity by enabling multiple terminal devices to use the same time-frequency resources to transmit data. A common NOMA scheme is that the transmission signals of the transmitting equipment are superimposed in the power domain, and the receiving equipment uses an interference cancellation algorithm to eliminate interference between UEs.
此外，业界还提出了多个终端设备在码域叠加的NOMA方案。一种方案是稀疏码分多址(sparse code multiple access,SCMA)技术，它通过不同的稀疏码区分终端设备，利用稀疏码的稀疏特性降低终端设备之间的干扰以提升传输性能。另一种方案是多用户共享接入(multiuser shared access，MUSA)技术，它通过不同的扩展序列区分终端设备，利用扩展序列的低相关性降低终端设备之间的干扰以提升传输性。In addition, the industry has also proposed a NOMA scheme in which multiple terminal devices are superimposed in the code domain. One solution is sparse code multiple access (SCMA) technology, which distinguishes terminal devices through different sparse codes, and uses the sparse characteristics of sparse codes to reduce interference between terminal devices to improve transmission performance. Another solution is multi-user shared access (MUSA) technology, which distinguishes terminal devices through different extended sequences, and uses low correlation of extended sequences to reduce interference between terminal devices to improve transmission.
图7示出了SCMA技术的示意图，在图7所示示例中稀疏码包括6种不同的稀疏码，将每个稀疏码对应的4个RE定义为一个扩展单元，将扩展单元的大小定义为扩展因子，此处扩展因子为4。扩展因子还可以是其他数值。其中稀疏码1的第1个和第3个RE固定为0，而第2个和第4个RE固定为0，依次类推。Figure 7 shows a schematic diagram of the SCMA technology. In the example shown in Figure 7, the sparse code includes 6 different sparse codes. The 4 REs corresponding to each sparse code are defined as an extension unit, and the size of the extension unit is defined as Expansion factor, here the expansion factor is 4. The expansion factor can also be other values. Among them, the first and third REs of the sparse code 1 are fixed to 0, the second and fourth REs are fixed to 0, and so on.
图8示出了MUSA技术的示意图。在图8所示示例中，MUSA扩展序列包括8个不同的扩展序列，将每个扩展序列对应的4个RE定义为一个扩展单元，对应扩展因子为4。Figure 8 shows a schematic of MUSA technology. In the example shown in FIG. 8, the MUSA extension sequence includes 8 different extension sequences. The 4 REs corresponding to each extension sequence are defined as an extension unit, and the corresponding extension factor is 4.
在无线通信***中，无线信道因为多径传播的影响通常呈现频率选择性衰落(frequency selective fading)，即不同频率资源位置具有不同的信道质量。如果预先通过信道估计获取准确的信道质量信息，可以在信道质量好的频域资源位置传输以提升传输效率。如果未能获取准确的信道质量信息，则可以利用频域分集传输，即在不同的频域资源位置传输，以提升传输的可靠性。本申请的方案可以有效提高频域分集传输的效果。In wireless communication systems, wireless channels usually show frequency selective fading due to the influence of multipath propagation, that is, different frequency resource locations have different channel qualities. If accurate channel quality information is obtained through channel estimation in advance, it can be transmitted at a frequency domain resource location with good channel quality to improve transmission efficiency. If accurate channel quality information cannot be obtained, frequency-domain diversity transmission can be used, that is, transmission at different frequency-domain resource locations to improve transmission reliability. The solution of the present application can effectively improve the effect of frequency domain diversity transmission.
下面，对本申请的发送设备和接收设备之间的通信过程进行详细说明。The communication process between the transmitting device and the receiving device of the present application will be described in detail below.
图9示出了发送设备#A发送数据的过程200，如图9所示，在S210，发送设备#A可以通过例如，比特加扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特加扰，得到加扰后的比特。FIG. 9 shows a process 200 of sending data by the sending device #A. As shown in FIG. 9, in S210, the sending device #A may perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a bit scrambling module or other module or unit to obtain Scrambled bits.
这里的输入比特可以是信息比特经过信道编码之后的编码比特。这里信道编码可以提供一定的纠错能力，具体的编码方式可以是低密度校验码(low density parity check，LDPC)，拓博(turbo)码，极化(polar)码等。The input bits here may be coded bits after the information bits are channel-coded. Here, the channel coding can provide a certain error correction capability. The specific coding method can be a low density check code (LDPC), a turbo code, a polar code, and the like.
另外，该输入比特可以是一段比特序列，比特加扰是将输入比特序列和加扰序列按比特进行异或操作，得到加扰后的比特。In addition, the input bit may be a bit sequence, and bit scrambling is an XOR operation of the input bit sequence and the scrambled sequence bit by bit to obtain the scrambled bits.
加扰序列可以按照预先定义的规则生成，其本身具有一定的随机性。The scrambling sequence can be generated according to a predefined rule, which itself has a certain randomness.
在本申请中，不同的发送设备可以利用不同的加扰序列进行加扰，从而，能够降低不同发送设备的数据之间的相关性，减小同时发送时产生的干扰。In this application, different sending devices can use different scrambling sequences for scrambling, so that the correlation between data of different sending devices can be reduced, and interference generated during simultaneous sending can be reduced.
需要说明的是，上述比特加扰模块可以用比特交织代替，比特交织和比特加扰有类似的作用。比特交织和比特加扰也可以同时使用，可以先进行加扰再进行交织，也可以先进行交织再进行加扰，本申请不做限制。It should be noted that the above-mentioned bit scrambling module may be replaced by bit interleaving, and bit interleaving and bit scrambling have similar functions. Bit interleaving and bit scrambling can also be used at the same time, and scrambling can be performed before interleaving, or interleaving can be performed before scrambling, which is not limited in this application.
在S220，发送设备#A可以通过例如，调制模块等模块或单元，对加扰后的比特进行调制，得到调制符号序列，其中，该调制符号序列可以包括一个或多个调制符号。In S220, the transmitting device #A may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
其中，“调制”可以看作比特到符号(或者说，调制符号)的映射。在本申请中，作为调制方案可以列举π/2二进制相移键控(binary phase shift keying，BPSK)调制方案,BPSK 调制方案,正交相移键(quadrature pase shift keyin，QPSK)调制方案,16正交振幅调(quadrature amplitude modulation，QAM)调制方案，64QAM调制方案，256QAM调制方案等。Among them, "modulation" can be regarded as a mapping of bits to symbols (or modulation symbols). In this application, as the modulation scheme, a π / 2 binary phase shift keying (BPSK) modulation scheme, a BPSK modulation scheme, a quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) modulation scheme, 16 Quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) modulation scheme, 64QAM modulation scheme, 256QAM modulation scheme, etc.
以上这些方案都是将一个或多个比特映射为单个调制符号。还有一些方案将一个或多个比特映射为多个调制符号，也称为多维调制。例如，SCMA的一种码本将两比特映射到两个RE上，例如将00映射为(1，0)，将01映射为(0，1),将10映射为(0，－1),将11映射为(－1，0)，其中括号中的两个符号分别对应两个RE。These solutions all map one or more bits into a single modulation symbol. Still other schemes map one or more bits into multiple modulation symbols, also known as multi-dimensional modulation. For example, a codebook of SCMA maps two bits to two REs. For example, 00 is mapped to (1, 0), 01 is mapped to (0, 1), and 10 is mapped to (0, -1). Map 11 to (-1, 0), where the two symbols in parentheses correspond to two REs, respectively.
在S230，发送设备#A可以通过例如扩展模块或单元，对调制符号序列进行符号扩展，得到扩展后的调制符号序列。In S230, the transmitting device #A may perform symbol extension on the modulation symbol sequence by using, for example, an extension module or unit to obtain an extended modulation symbol sequence.
图10示出了本申请的扩展方法的一例，如图10所示，作为扩展的对象的调制符号序列包括两个调制符号，即，1和-1。FIG. 10 shows an example of the extension method of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the modulation symbol sequence as an extension target includes two modulation symbols, that is, 1 and -1.
图10所示扩展方式可以基于扩展序列进行，作为示例而非限定，该扩展序列可以为：为[1,j,-1,-j] T，将扩展序列和两个输入(即，扩展前的)调制符号分别相乘得到输出(即，扩展后的)调制符号序列。 The extension method shown in FIG. 10 may be performed based on the extension sequence. As an example and not limitation, the extension sequence may be: [1, j, -1, -j] T , and the extension sequence and two inputs (that is, before the extension) ) Modulation symbols are respectively multiplied to obtain an output (ie, extended) modulation symbol sequence.
其中，扩展后的调制符号序列中的前4个输出调制符号对应第一个输入调制符号，或者说，扩展后的调制符号序列中的前4个输出调制符号是第一个输入调制符号经扩展后生成的。扩展后的调制符号序列中的后4个输出调制符号对应第二个输入调制符号，或者说，扩展后的调制符号序列中的后4个输出调制符号是第二个输入调制符号经扩展后生成的。The first 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence correspond to the first input modulation symbol, or the first 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence are the first input modulation symbol after being expanded Generated after. The last 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence correspond to the second input modulation symbol, or the last 4 output modulation symbols in the extended modulation symbol sequence are generated after the second input modulation symbol is extended. of.
在本申请中，扩展因子(spreading factor)可以定义为扩展序列的长度，图10中扩展因子为4。扩展因子还可以理解为扩展单元的大小或者长度。In this application, the spreading factor can be defined as the length of the spreading sequence, and the spreading factor is 4 in FIG. 10. The expansion factor can also be understood as the size or length of the expansion unit.
扩展因子也可以称为扩频因子。为了描述方便，将每次符号扩展操作对应的输出符号定义为一个扩展单元。The spreading factor can also be called a spreading factor. For convenience of description, the output symbol corresponding to each sign extension operation is defined as an extension unit.
在本申请中，该扩展因子可以是由网络设备确定并下发给终端设备的，或者，该扩展因子也可以是通信***或通信协议预先定义的。In this application, the extension factor may be determined by a network device and delivered to a terminal device, or the extension factor may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
图10中每个扩展单元包括4个输出符号。为了支持更高的频谱效率或者覆盖增强，可以采用其他扩展因子。当扩展因子越小，每个扩展单元占用的资源越少，相同资源可以承载的数据越多，对应频谱效率越高。当扩展因子越大，每个扩展单元占用的资源越多，传输可靠性提升，对应的网络覆盖增强。Each expansion unit in FIG. 10 includes 4 output symbols. To support higher spectral efficiency or coverage enhancement, other spreading factors can be used. When the expansion factor is smaller, the resources occupied by each expansion unit are less, the more data can be carried by the same resource, and the corresponding spectrum efficiency is higher. When the expansion factor is larger, the resources occupied by each expansion unit are more, the transmission reliability is improved, and the corresponding network coverage is enhanced.
其中，扩展因子L可以为整数，例如，扩展因子L可以为1，或者，扩展因子L可以为大于或等于2的整数。The expansion factor L may be an integer. For example, the expansion factor L may be 1 or the expansion factor L may be an integer greater than or equal to 2.
图11示出了本申请的扩展方法的另一例，如图11所示，设作为扩展的对象的调试符号序列包括两个调制符号，即，1和-1。FIG. 11 shows another example of the extension method of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a debug symbol sequence as an extension target includes two modulation symbols, that is, 1 and -1.
图11所示扩展方式可以基于扩展矩阵进行，作为示例而，设扩展矩阵为W，将扩展矩阵和输入调制符号进行矩阵相乘得到输出调制符号。The expansion method shown in FIG. 11 can be performed based on the expansion matrix. As an example, let the expansion matrix be W, and multiply the expansion matrix and the input modulation symbol to obtain an output modulation symbol.
与基于扩展序列的符号扩展的扩展方法不同，基于扩展矩阵的扩展方法每次可能有多个输入调制符号。此时，扩展因子对应扩展矩阵W的行数。扩展因子还可以理解为扩展单元的大小或者长度。Different from the spreading method based on the spreading sequence, the spreading method based on the spreading matrix may have multiple input modulation symbols at a time. At this time, the expansion factor corresponds to the number of rows of the expansion matrix W. The expansion factor can also be understood as the size or length of the expansion unit.
将每次符号扩展操作对应的输出符号定义为一个符号扩展单元，图11中每个符号扩展单元包括4个输出符号。当采用基于扩展矩阵的符号扩展方法时，也可以通过调整扩展 因子提升频谱效率或增强网络覆盖。The output symbol corresponding to each sign extension operation is defined as a sign extension unit, and each sign extension unit in FIG. 11 includes 4 output symbols. When using the spreading matrix-based sign extension method, you can also increase the spectral efficiency or network coverage by adjusting the expansion factor.
图12示出了本申请的扩展方法的另一例，在该方法中可以基于扩展序列集合进行扩展，即，N个输入调制符号被映射为N个调制符号序列，即，每个输入调制符号序列分别被映射为一个调制符号序列。例如，如果输入调制符号是x 1，则经过扩展后的输出调制符号序列可以为[1，j，－1，－j]。 FIG. 12 shows another example of the extension method of the present application, in which the extension can be performed based on a set of extension sequences, that is, N input modulation symbols are mapped into N modulation symbol sequences, that is, each input modulation symbol sequence Each is mapped into a modulation symbol sequence. For example, if the input modulation symbol is x 1 , the output modulation symbol sequence after expansion may be [1, j, -1, -j].
在该方法中，扩展因子可以定义为扩展后的调制符号序列包括的符号的数量。例如，图12对应的扩展因子为4，每个扩展单元包含4个输出符号，也可以通过调整扩展因子提升频谱效率或增强网络覆盖。In this method, the spreading factor may be defined as the number of symbols included in the spread modulation symbol sequence. For example, the expansion factor corresponding to FIG. 12 is 4, and each expansion unit contains 4 output symbols. The expansion factor can also be adjusted to improve spectrum efficiency or enhance network coverage.
在S240，发送设备可以通过例如交织模块或单元，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行交织。In S240, the transmitting device may interleave the extended modulation symbol sequence through, for example, an interleaving module or unit.
其中，该交织是以调制符号为颗粒度(或者说，单位)进行的。The interleaving is performed by using a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
在本申请中，交织的单位(或者说，颗粒度)可以是指交织过程中，移位的对象。In the present application, the unit (or granularity) of interleaving may refer to an object that is shifted during the interleaving process.
例如，在以RB(或者，RB集)为单位的交织中，在交织前两个相邻的RB(或者，RB集)，在交织后不相邻。但是，在以RB(或者，RB集)为单位的交织中，同一RB(或者，RB集)中的调制符号，在交织前与交织后的相对位置不发生变化。For example, in interleaving in units of RBs (or RB sets), two adjacent RBs (or RB sets) before interleaving are not adjacent after interleaving. However, in interleaving using RB (or RB set) as a unit, the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) before and after interleaving do not change.
再例如，在以调制符号为单位的交织中，在交织前两个相邻的调制符号，在交织后可能不相邻。作为示例而非限定，在以调制符号为单位的交织中，同一RB(或者，RB集)中的调制符号，在交织前与交织后的相对位置发生变化。As another example, in interleaving in units of modulation symbols, two adjacent modulation symbols before interleaving may not be adjacent after interleaving. By way of example and not limitation, in interleaving in units of modulation symbols, the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) are changed before and after interleaving.
需要说明的是：“在交织前两个相邻的调制符号，在交织后可能不相邻”可以理解为，在交织块中可以包括多个调制符号对，每个调制符号对包括相邻的两个调制符号，在交织后，该多个调制符号对中的大部分(也可能是全部)调制符号对中的调制符号不再相邻，而仅有少数(也可能没有)调制符号对中的调制符号仍然相邻。It should be noted that “two adjacent modulation symbols before interleaving may not be adjacent after interleaving” can be understood to include multiple modulation symbol pairs in the interleaved block, and each modulation symbol pair includes adjacent After the two modulation symbols are interleaved, the modulation symbols in most (or possibly all) of the multiple modulation symbol pairs are no longer adjacent, and only a few (or may not) be in the modulation symbol pairs The modulation symbols are still adjacent.
作为示例而非限定，在本申请中，可以采用以下至少一种方式进行交织。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, at least one of the following methods may be used for interleaving.
方式1 Way 1
即，行列交织方式That is, row-column interleaving
具体地说，不失一般性，设交织的对象包括K个扩展单元，并且，设扩展因子为L。则扩展后的符号数为K×L。Specifically, without loss of generality, let the interleaved object include K extension units, and let the extension factor be L. Then the number of symbols after expansion is K × L.
在该方式1中，发送设备#A可以将K×L个符号(记作，{s 0,s 1,…,s KL-1}按照以下表1所示的先列后行的方式进行排列，例如，发送设备#A可以将调制符号序列{s 0,s 1,…,s KL-1}按照先列后方的方式填充至交织矩阵(或者说，交织矩阵对应的存储空间)。 In this method 1, the transmitting device #A may arrange K × L symbols (denoted as {s 0 , s 1 ,..., S KL-1 ) in a row-to-row manner as shown in Table 1 below. For example, the transmitting device #A may fill the modulation symbol sequence {s 0 , s 1 , ..., s KL-1 } into the interleaving matrix (or the storage space corresponding to the interleaving matrix) in a leading -to- back manner.
其后，发送设备#A可以按行输出交织后的调制符号序列，例如，如表1所示，该交织后的调制符号序列可以为s 0,s L,…,s LK-L,s 1,…,s LK-L+1,…,s L-1,…,s LK-1。 Thereafter, the transmitting device #A may output the interleaved modulation symbol sequence in rows. For example, as shown in Table 1, the interleaved modulation symbol sequence may be s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 ,…, s L-1 ,…, s LK-1 .
表1Table 1
S0S0 SLSL …... SLK-1SLK-1
S1S1 SL+1SL + 1 …... S LK-L+1S LK-L + 1
…... …... …... …...
SL-1SL-1 S2L-1S2L-1 …... S2L-1S2L-1
另外，表1所示的行列交织(或者说，行列交织矩阵)的行数可以为扩展因子L，从 而，使得一个扩展单元的L个符号在交织后的符号序列中足够分散，实现频域分集传输。In addition, the number of rows of the row-column interleaving (or row-column interleaving matrix) shown in Table 1 can be an expansion factor L, so that the L symbols of an extension unit are sufficiently dispersed in the interleaved symbol sequence to achieve frequency domain diversity. transmission.
应理解，以上列举的行列交织的行数与扩展因子L的关系仅为示例性说明，本申请并未限定于此，例如，行列交织矩阵的行数也可以是扩展因子L的整数倍。It should be understood that the relationship between the number of rows and columns interleaved and the expansion factor L listed above is only exemplary, and the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the number of rows of the row and column interleaving matrix may be an integer multiple of the expansion factor L.
可选地，如以下表2所示，在发送设备#A可以按行输出交织后的调制符号序列之前，发送设备#A还可以按照列方向，对填充至交织矩阵中的调制符号进行循环移位。Optionally, as shown in Table 2 below, before the transmitting device #A can output the interleaved modulation symbol sequence in rows, the transmitting device #A may also perform cyclic shift on the modulation symbols filled in the interleaving matrix according to the column direction. Bit.
表2Table 2
S0S0 S2L-1S2L-1 S3L-2S3L-2 …...
S1S1 SLSL S3L-1S3L-1 …...
…... …... …... …...
SL-1SL-1 S2L-2S2L-2 S3L-3S3L-3 …...
即，如表2所示，该表2的第一列可以和表1的第一列相同，即，第一列的移位值值可以为0。That is, as shown in Table 2, the first column of Table 2 may be the same as the first column of Table 1, that is, the shift value of the first column may be 0.
第二列进行了移位值为1的循环移位，即，从序列{s L,s L+1,…,s 2L-1}变换为{s 2L-1,s L,…,s 2L-2}。 The second column is cyclically shifted with a shift value of 1, that is, transformed from the sequence {s L , s L + 1 , ..., s 2L-1 } to {s 2L-1 , s L , ..., s 2L -2 }.
第三列进行了移位值为2的循环移位，即从序列{s 2L,s 2L+1,…,s 3L-1}变换为{s 3L-2,s 3L-1,…,s 3L-3}。 The third column is cyclically shifted with a shift value of 2, which is transformed from the sequence {s 2L , s 2L + 1 , ..., s 3L-1 } to {s 3L-2 , s 3L-1 , ..., s 3L-3 }.
作为示例而非限定，在本申请中，上述移位值可以是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。By way of example and not limitation, in the present application, the above-mentioned shift value may be determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，可以采用例如3GPP TS38.211中第5.2.1节所述的方法生成随机序列c(i)，其中序列的初始值c init用下面公式生成： For example, in this application, the cell identifier may be M. For example, the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula:
c init＝(M+n×2 15)mod 2 31 c init = (M + n × 2 15 ) mod 2 31
其中，n是时隙编号。Where n is the slot number.
进而，在本申请中，第i列的循环移位值ω(i)可以根据以下公式确定：Further, in this application, the cyclic shift value ω (i) of the i-th column can be determined according to the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000005
其中，V可以为
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000006
表示向上取整运算。 Where V can be
Figure PCTCN2019092303-appb-000006
Represents the round-up operation.
并且，例如，在本申请中小区标识可以为M，可以采用例如3GPP TS38.211中第5.2.1节所述的方法生成随机序列c(i)，其中序列的初始值c init用下面公式生成： And, for example, the cell identifier in this application may be M. For example, the method described in section 5.2.1 of 3GPP TS38.211 may be used to generate a random sequence c (i), where the initial value of the sequence c init is generated using the following formula :
需要说明的是，上述小区标识M可以是网络设备发送给终端设备的。It should be noted that the above-mentioned cell identifier M may be sent by the network device to the terminal device.
根据本申请的方案，通过按列循环移位，能够使扩展后的符号进一步分散，从而获取频域分集增益。According to the solution of the present application, by performing a cyclic shift by column, the spread symbols can be further dispersed, thereby obtaining a frequency domain diversity gain.
方式2 Way 2
即，二次置换多项式(quadratic permutation polynomial，QPP)交织方式That is, quadratic permutation polynomial (QPP) interleaving method
作为示例而非限定，设扩展后的调制符号序列包括K×L个符号。By way of example and not limitation, it is assumed that the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K × L symbols.
则在交织前该K×L个符号中的第i个符号，在交织后的调制符号序列中的位置(记作，π(i))可以表示为以下公式1。Then, the position (denoted as π (i)) of the ith symbol in the K × L symbols before interleaving in the interleaved modulation symbol sequence can be expressed as the following formula 1.
π(i)＝mod(f 1×i 2+f 2×i,L×K)，i＝0,…,L×K-1         公式1 π (i) = mod (f 1 × i 2 + f 2 × i, L × K), i = 0, ..., L × K-1 Formula 1
其中，f 1和f 2根据交织块大小LⅹK进行选取，一种选取方法可以参考3GPP TS36.212中的表5.1.3-3。 Among them, f 1 and f 2 are selected according to the interleave block size LⅹK. For a selection method, refer to Table 5.1.3-3 in 3GPP TS36.212.
可选地，该交织还可以基于接收设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定。Optionally, the interleaving may also be determined based on a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving device is located.
例如，在交织后的调制符号序列中的位置(记作，σ(i))可以表示为以下公式2。For example, the position (denoted as σ (i)) in the interleaved modulation symbol sequence can be expressed as Equation 2 below.
σ(i)＝mod(π(i)+a k,L×K)          公式2 σ (i) = mod (π (i) + a k , L × K) Equation 2
其中，π(i)可以由上述公式1确定，a k是基于小区标识确定的参数，例如，该a k可以是小区标识本身，或者，该a k也可以是基于小区标识初始化得到的随机数。 Among them, π (i) can be determined by the above formula 1, and a k is a parameter determined based on the cell identity. For example, a k can be the cell identity itself, or the a k can also be a random number initialized based on the cell identity. .
在本申请中，扩展后的调制符号序列可以对应一个或多个OFDM符号本申请并未特别限定。In this application, the extended modulation symbol sequence may correspond to one or more OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
并且，当扩展后的调制符号序列对应多个OFDM符号时，该交织可以以OFDM符号组作为交织块来进行。In addition, when the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to a plurality of OFDM symbols, the interleaving may be performed using an OFDM symbol group as an interleaving block.
其中，一个交织块是交织器一次交织处理所处理的数据量的大小，即，一个交织块可以包括多个数据(例如，上述调制符号)，交织器对于所输入的交织块中的数据，在该交织块的范围内进行位置变更。One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the interleaver in one interleaving process. That is, one interleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). The position is changed within the range of the interleaved block.
另外，在本申请中，一个OFDM符号组可以包括一个OFDM符号。一个OFDM符号组也可以包括多个(例如，两个或两个以上)OFDM符号。本申请并未特别限定。In addition, in this application, one OFDM symbol group may include one OFDM symbol. One OFDM symbol group may also include multiple (for example, two or more) OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
作为示例而非限定，设一个OFDM符号组也可以包括T个OFDM符号，T为大于或等于1的整数，则该T的具体值可以是网络设备#A确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备#A的。或者说，在本申请中，交织(或解交织中)的交织块的大小可以由网络设备确定，并指示给终端设备。By way of example and not limitation, it is assumed that one OFDM symbol group may also include T OFDM symbols, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the specific value of T may be determined by network device #A and issued through, for example, higher-level signaling. To terminal device #A. In other words, in the present application, the size of the interleaved (or deinterleaved) interleaved blocks may be determined by the network device and indicated to the terminal device.
或者，该T的具体值可以是通信***或通信协议预先定义的，本申请并未特别限定。Alternatively, the specific value of T may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol, which is not particularly limited in this application.
另外，在本申请中，上述以调制符号为单位的交织(即，S240)可以基于规定的触发指令执行。In addition, in the present application, the above-mentioned interleaving in units of modulation symbols (that is, S240) may be performed based on a predetermined trigger instruction.
例如，当该发送设备#A为终端设备时，该终端设备可以基于是否接收到触发指令#a的情况，确定是否执行S240。其中，该触发指令指示#a发送设备需要以调制符号为单位对调制符号序列进行的交织。For example, when the sending device #A is a terminal device, the terminal device may determine whether to execute S240 based on whether a trigger instruction #a is received. The trigger instruction indicates that the #a transmitting device needs to perform interleaving of the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols.
当该发送设备#A为网络设备时，该网络设备可以向发送设备发送触发指令#b，该触发指令#b可以用于指示接收设备需要对调制符号序列进行了以调制符号为单位的解交织，或者说，从而，该触发指令#b可以用于指示调制符号序列被进行了以调制符号为单位的交织，从而，接收设备可以基于是否接收到上述触发指令#b的情况，确定是否执行以调制符号为单位的解交织(随后详细说明)。When the sending device #A is a network device, the network device may send a trigger instruction #b to the sending device. The trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the receiving device needs to deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols. Or, in other words, the trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is interleaved in units of modulation symbols. Therefore, the receiving device may determine whether to execute the sequence based on whether the trigger instruction #b is received. Deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols (detailed later).
作为示例非限定，在本申请中，网络设备可以综合信道质量、业务需求等因素确定是否需要执行以调制符号为单位的交织或解交织。As an example, without limitation, in this application, a network device may determine factors such as channel quality, service requirements, and the like to determine whether to perform interleaving or deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols.
例如，如果业务对通信的可靠性和效率的要求较高(例如，用户或业务等级较高，或者所传输的信息较为重要)，则网络设备可以确定需要进行以调制符号为单位的交织。For example, if the service requires higher reliability and efficiency of communication (for example, the user or service level is high, or the information transmitted is more important), the network device may determine that interleaving in units of modulation symbols is required.
图13示出了以一个OFDM符号作为一个交织块(或者说，一个OFDM符号组包括一个OFDM符号)时本申请的交织的过程。FIG. 13 illustrates an interleaving process of the present application when an OFDM symbol is used as an interleaving block (or, an OFDM symbol group includes one OFDM symbol).
设一个OFDM符号中包括M个调制符号，并且，设M个调制符号的排列顺序为：调制符号#0、调制符号#1、调制符号#2、调制符号#3、……、调制符号#M。It is assumed that one OFDM symbol includes M modulation symbols, and the arrangement order of the M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol # 1, modulation symbol # 2, modulation symbol # 3, ..., modulation symbol #M .
则在图13所示交织方式(即，一个OFDM符号组包括一个OFDM符号)中，则该交织是将该OFDM符号组(即，一个OFDM符号)中调制符号在该OFDM符号组(即，一个OFDM符号)内的排列顺序进行变更。In the interleaving manner shown in FIG. 13 (that is, one OFDM symbol group includes one OFDM symbol), the interleaving is to modulate symbols in the OFDM symbol group (that is, one OFDM symbol) to the OFDM symbol group (that is, one The arrangement order in OFDM symbols) is changed.
即，经过交织后，该M个调制符号的排列顺序为：调制符号#0、调制符号#L、……、调制符号#M-L、调制符号#1、……、调制符号#M-L+1、……、调制符号#L-1、……、调制符号#M-1。That is, after interleaving, the arrangement order of the M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol #L, ..., modulation symbol #ML, modulation symbol # 1, ..., modulation symbol # M-L + 1 , ..., modulation symbol # L-1, ..., modulation symbol # M-1.
即，如图13所示，设相邻的两个OFDM符号(记作OFDM符号#1和OFDM符号#2)分别作为两个OFDM符号组，则基于图13所示的以一个OFDM符号作为一个交织块的交织中，假设以一个调制符号#A在交织前位于OFDM符号#1，则在交织后，该调制符号#A不会位于OFDM符号#2。That is, as shown in FIG. 13, it is assumed that two adjacent OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1 and OFDM symbol # 2) are respectively two OFDM symbol groups, and based on one OFDM symbol shown in FIG. 13 as one In the interleaving of an interleaved block, it is assumed that one modulation symbol #A is located at OFDM symbol # 1 before interleaving, and after interleaving, the modulation symbol #A will not be located at OFDM symbol # 2.
图14示出了以2(即，T的一例)个OFDM符号作为一个交织块(或者说，一个OFDM符号组包括2个OFDM符号)时本申请的交织的过程。FIG. 14 shows an interleaving process of the present application when 2 (that is, an example of T) OFDM symbols are used as one interleaving block (or one OFDM symbol group includes 2 OFDM symbols).
设一个OFDM符号中包括M个调制符号，即，一个OFDM符号组包括2M个调制符号，并且，设2M个调制符号的排列顺序为：调制符号#0、调制符号#1、调制符号#2、调制符号#3、……、调制符号#2M。Let one OFDM symbol include M modulation symbols, that is, one OFDM symbol group includes 2M modulation symbols, and let the arrangement order of 2M modulation symbols be: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol # 1, modulation symbol # 2, Modulation symbols # 3, ..., modulation symbols # 2M.
则在图14所示交织方式(即，一个OFDM符号组包括2个OFDM符号)中，则该交织是将该OFDM符号组(即，2个OFDM符号)中调制符号在该OFDM符号组(即，2个OFDM符号)内的排列顺序进行变更。In the interleaving manner shown in FIG. 14 (that is, one OFDM symbol group includes 2 OFDM symbols), the interleaving is to modulate symbols in the OFDM symbol group (that is, 2 OFDM symbols) to the OFDM symbol group (that is, , 2 OFDM symbols).
即，经过交织后，该2M个调制符号的排列顺序为：调制符号#0、调制符号#L、……、调制符号#2M-L、调制符号#1、……、调制符号#2M-L+1、……、调制符号#L-1、……、调制符号#2M-1。That is, after interleaving, the arrangement order of the 2M modulation symbols is: modulation symbol # 0, modulation symbol #L, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-L, modulation symbol # 1, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-L +1, ..., modulation symbol # L-1, ..., modulation symbol # 2M-1.
即，如图14所示，设相邻的两个OFDM符号(记作OFDM符号#1和OFDM符号#2)分别作为一个OFDM符号组，则基于图14所示的以2个OFDM符号作为一个交织块的交织中，假设以一个调制符号#A在交织前位于OFDM符号#1，则在交织后，该调制符号#A可能位于OFDM符号#2，也可能位于OFDM符号#1。That is, as shown in FIG. 14, two adjacent OFDM symbols (denoted as OFDM symbol # 1 and OFDM symbol # 2) are respectively set as one OFDM symbol group. Based on the two OFDM symbols shown in FIG. 14 as one In the interleaving of an interleaving block, it is assumed that a modulation symbol #A is located at OFDM symbol # 1 before interleaving. After interleaving, the modulation symbol #A may be located at OFDM symbol # 2 or may be located at OFDM symbol # 1.
在S250，发送设备#A可以将如上所述交织后的调制符号序列映射到时频资源上，从而通过该时频资源发送该调制符号序列，其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。In S250, the transmitting device #A may map the interleaved modulation symbol sequence to the time-frequency resource as described above, so as to transmit the modulation symbol sequence through the time-frequency resource. The process may be similar to the prior art. Here, In order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
可选地，在以调制符号为单位对扩展后的调制符号交织之后，发送设备#A还可以以RB集为单位对经过一次交织的调制符号序列再次进行交织。Optionally, after interleaving the extended modulation symbols in units of modulation symbols, the transmitting device #A may further interleave the modulation symbol sequences that have undergone one interleaving in units of RB sets.
其中，一个RB集可以包括例如，2个RB。Among them, one RB set may include, for example, 2 RBs.
其中，该以RB集为单位的交织可以在由虚拟资源块(virtual resource block,VRB)到物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)的映射过程中进行。The interleaving with the RB set as a unit may be performed in a mapping process from a virtual resource block (VRB) to a physical resource block (PRB).
其中，VRB是资源分配时对应的频域资源，PRB则是实际传输时对应的频域资源。如图15所示，VRB到PRB映射时以RB集(RB Bundle)为映射单元，每个RB集包含2个RB，连续编号的VRB被分配到不连续编号的PRB上。编号1，2，3，4的VRB分别映射到编号1，2，25，26的PRB上，不连续编号的PRB对应不同的频域资源位置，因此可以实现频域分集传输。Among them, VRB is a frequency domain resource corresponding to resource allocation, and PRB is a frequency domain resource corresponding to actual transmission. As shown in FIG. 15, when mapping from VRB to PRB, an RB set (RB bundle) is used as a mapping unit. Each RB set includes 2 RBs, and consecutively numbered VRBs are allocated to discontinuously numbered PRBs. VRBs with numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 are mapped to PRBs with numbers 1, 2, 25, and 26. Discontinuously numbered PRBs correspond to different frequency-domain resource locations, so frequency-domain diversity transmission can be achieved.
图16示出了接收设备#A接收数据的过程300，其中，该数据可以是上述发送设备#A 发送的数据，或者说，该接收设备#A可以是该发送设备#A所发送的数据的接收端。FIG. 16 shows a process 300 of receiving data by the receiving device #A. The data may be data sent by the sending device #A, or the receiving device #A may be data sent by the sending device #A. Receiving end.
其中，该数据可以理解为调制信号，或者，该数据可以理解为承载于调制符号中的数据。The data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
在S310，接收设备#A可以通过时频资源接收来自发送设备(例如，发送设备#A)的调制符号序列。In S310, the receiving device #A may receive a modulation symbol sequence from a transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through a time-frequency resource.
可选地，该调制符号序列可以是发送设备可以以RB集为单位交织后的调制符号序列。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
此情况下，接收设备#A可以以RB集为单位对该调制符号序列进行解交织。In this case, the receiving device #A may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
其中，上述各过程可以与现有技术相似，这里为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The above processes may be similar to the prior art. To avoid redundant descriptions, detailed descriptions are omitted here.
在S320，接收设备#A可以调制符号为单位，对调制符号序列进行解交织。In S320, the receiving device #A may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence as a unit.
即，该解交织过程可以是S340所述过程的逆过程。That is, the deinterleaving process may be a reverse process of the process described in S340.
其中，该解交织是以调制符号为颗粒度(或者说，单位)进行的。The deinterleaving is performed by using a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
在本申请中，解交织的单位(或者说，颗粒度)可以是指解交织过程中，移位的对象。In the present application, the unit (or granularity) of deinterleaving may refer to an object shifted during the deinterleaving process.
例如，在以RB(或者，RB集)为单位的解交织中，在解交织前两个相邻的RB(或者，RB集)，在解交织后不相邻。但是，在以RB(或者，RB集)为单位的解交织中，同一RB(或者，RB集)中的调制符号，在解交织前与解交织后的相对位置不发生变化。For example, in deinterleaving in units of RBs (or RB sets), two adjacent RBs (or RB sets) before deinterleaving are not adjacent after deinterleaving. However, in deinterleaving in units of RBs (or RB sets), the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB sets) before deinterleaving and after deinterleaving do not change.
再例如，在以调制符号为单位的解交织中，在解交织前两个相邻的调制符号，在解交织后不相邻。作为示例而非限定，在以调制符号为单位的解交织中，同一RB(或者，RB集)中的调制符号，在解交织前与解交织后的相对位置发生变化。As another example, in deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols, two adjacent modulation symbols before deinterleaving are not adjacent after deinterleaving. By way of example and not limitation, in deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols, the relative positions of modulation symbols in the same RB (or RB set) before deinterleaving and after deinterleaving change.
作为示例而非限定，在本申请中，可以采用以下至少一种方式进行解交织。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, at least one of the following methods may be used for deinterleaving.
方式3 Way 3
即，行列解交织方式That is, the row and column deinterleaving method
具体地说，不失一般性，设解交织的对象包括K个扩展单元，并且，设扩展因子为L。则待解交织的调制符号序列包括的符号数为K×L。Specifically, without loss of generality, it is assumed that the object of deinterleaving includes K extension units, and the extension factor is set to L. The number of symbols included in the modulation symbol sequence to be deinterleaved is K × L.
在该方式1中，接收设备#A可以将K×L个符号(即，s 0,s L,…,s LK-L,s 1,…,s LK-L+1,…,s L-1,…,s LK-1)，按照以下表1所示的先行后例的方式进行排列，例如，接收设备#A可以将调制符号序列s 0,s L,…,s LK-L,s 1,…,s LK-L+1,…,s L-1,…,s LK-1按照先行后列的方式填充至解交织矩阵(或者说，解交织矩阵对应的存储空间)。 In this manner 1, the receiving device #A can set K × L symbols (that is, s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 , ..., s L- 1 ,…, s LK-1 ), arranged in the manner shown in Table 1 below. For example, the receiving device #A can place the modulation symbol sequence s 0 , s L , ..., s LK-L , s 1 , ..., s LK-L + 1 , ..., s L-1 , ..., s LK-1 are filled into the deinterleaving matrix (or the storage space corresponding to the deinterleaving matrix) in a first - matter -last-by- column manner.
其后，接收设备#A可以按行输出解交织后的调制符号序列，例如，如上述表1所示，该解交织后的调制符号序列可以为{s 0,s 1,…,s KL-1}。 Thereafter, the receiving device #A may output the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence in rows. For example, as shown in Table 1 above, the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence may be {s 0 , s 1 , ..., s KL- 1 }.
可选地，当发送设备#A按照上述表2方式进行了循环移位时，接收设备#A还可以相应地进行循环位移，以将表2所示交织矩阵恢复为表1所示，再进行输出。Optionally, when the transmitting device #A performs a cyclic shift according to the manner in Table 2 above, the receiving device #A may also perform a cyclic shift accordingly to restore the interleaving matrix shown in Table 2 to that shown in Table 1, and then perform Output.
方式4 Way 4
即，QPP解交织方式That is, the QPP deinterleaving method
作为示例而非限定，设待解交织的调制符号序列包括K×L个符号。By way of example and not limitation, it is assumed that the modulation symbol sequence to be deinterleaved includes K × L symbols.
则如上述公式1所示，在解交织前该K×L个符号中的位置为π(i)的符号，在解交织后的调制符号序列中的位置为i。Then, as shown in Formula 1 above, before the deinterleaving, the position of the K × L symbols is π (i), and the position in the deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence is i.
可选地，该解交织还可以基于接收设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定。Optionally, the deinterleaving may also be determined based on a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving device is located.
例如，如上述公式2所示，在解交织前的调制符号序列中的位置为σ(i)的符号在解交织后的位置为i。For example, as shown in Formula 2 above, the position of a symbol in the modulation symbol sequence before deinterleaving at σ (i) is i after deinterleaving.
在本申请中，扩展后的调制符号序列可以对应一个或多个OFDM符号本申请并未特别限定。In this application, the extended modulation symbol sequence may correspond to one or more OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
并且，当扩展后的调制符号序列对应多个OFDM符号时，该解交织可以以OFDM符号组作为交织块来进行。In addition, when the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to a plurality of OFDM symbols, the deinterleaving may be performed using an OFDM symbol group as an interleaving block.
其中，一个交织块是解交织器在一次解交织处理所处理的数据量的大小，即，一个解交织块可以包括多个数据(例如，上述调制符号)，解交织器对于所输入的解交织块中的数据，在该解交织块的范围内进行位置变更。One interleaving block is the size of the amount of data processed by the deinterleaver in one deinterleaving process, that is, one deinterleaving block may include multiple data (for example, the above-mentioned modulation symbols). The data in the block is changed in position within the range of the deinterleaved block.
另外，在本申请中，一个OFDM符号组可以包括一个OFDM符号。一个OFDM符号组也可以包括多个(例如，两个或两个以上)OFDM符号。本申请并未特别限定。In addition, in this application, one OFDM symbol group may include one OFDM symbol. One OFDM symbol group may also include multiple (for example, two or more) OFDM symbols. This application is not particularly limited.
其中，该基于OFDM符号组的解交织过程可以是上述OFDM符号组的交织过程的逆过程，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The de-interleaving process based on the OFDM symbol group may be a reverse process of the above-mentioned interleaving process of the OFDM symbol group. To avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
在S330，接收设备#A可以通过例如解扩模块或单元，对调制符号序列进行符号解扩。In S330, the receiving device #A may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
其中，该过程可以是上述S230的逆过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be the reverse process of the above S230. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
在S340，接收设备#A可以通过例如，解调模块等模块或单元，对解扩后的调制符号序列进行解调。In S340, the receiving device #A may demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence through a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
其中，该过程可以是上述S220的逆过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be the reverse process of the above S220. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
在S350，接收设备#A可以通过例如，比特解扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特解扰，得到原始比特。In S350, the receiving device #A may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
其中，上述S330～S350的过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The processes from S330 to S350 may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
另外，在本申请中，上述以调制符号为单位的解交织(即，S320)可以基于规定的触发指令#a(即，第一指示信息的一例)执行。In addition, in the present application, the above-mentioned deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols (that is, S320) may be performed based on a predetermined trigger instruction #a (that is, an example of the first instruction information).
例如，当该发送设备#A为终端设备时，该终端设备可以基于是否接收到上述触发指令#a的情况，确定是否执行S240。For example, when the sending device #A is a terminal device, the terminal device may determine whether to perform S240 based on whether the above-mentioned trigger instruction #a is received.
即，在本申请中，网络设备可以综合信道质量、业务需求等因素确定是否需要终端设备执行该S240。That is, in this application, the network device may determine factors such as channel quality and service requirements to determine whether a terminal device is required to perform the S240.
例如，如果业务对通信的可靠性和效率的要求较高(例如，用户或业务等级较高，或者所传输的信息较为重要)，则网络设备可以确定需要进行以调制符号为单位的交织。For example, if the service requires higher reliability and efficiency of communication (for example, the user or service level is high, or the information transmitted is more important), the network device may determine that interleaving in units of modulation symbols is required.
此时，网络设备可以向终端设备发送该触发指令#a，该触发指令指示#a发送设备需要以调制符号为单位对调制符号序列进行的交织。At this time, the network device may send the trigger instruction #a to the terminal device, and the trigger instruction instructs the #a sending device to interleave the modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as a unit.
再例如，当该发送设备#A为网络设备时，该网络设备还可以向发送设备发送触发指令#b，该触发指令#b可以用于指示接收设备需要对调制符号序列进行了以调制符号为单位的解交织，或者说，从而，该触发指令#b可以用于指示调制符号序列被进行了以调制符号为单位的交织，从而，接收设备可以基于是否接收到上述触发指令#b的情况，确定是否执行以调制符号为单位的解交织(随后详细说明)。As another example, when the sending device #A is a network device, the network device may also send a trigger instruction #b to the sending device. The trigger instruction #b may be used to indicate that the receiving device needs to perform a modulation symbol sequence with the modulation symbol as Unit de-interleaving, or in other words, the trigger instruction #b can be used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence is interleaved with the modulation symbol as a unit, so that the receiving device can base on whether the trigger instruction #b is received, It is determined whether to perform deinterleaving in units of modulation symbols (explained in detail later).
图17示出了发送设备#B发送数据的过程400，如图17所示，在S410，发送设备#B可以通过例如，比特加扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特加扰，得到加扰后的比特。FIG. 17 shows a process 400 in which the sending device #B sends data. As shown in FIG. 17, in S410, the sending device #B can perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a module or unit such as a bit scrambling module to obtain Scrambled bits.
其中，该过程可以与S210中发生设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省 略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S210. Here, in order to avoid redundant descriptions, detailed descriptions are omitted.
在S420，发送设备#B可以通过例如，调制模块等模块或单元，对加扰后的比特进行调制，得到调制符号序列，其中，该调制符号序列可以包括一个或多个调制符号。In S420, the transmitting device #B may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
其中，该过程可以与S220中发生设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S220. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
在S430，发送设备#B可以通过例如，层映射模块等模块或单元，对调制符号进行层映射，以确定多个传输层所分别对应的调制符号序列。In S430, the transmitting device #B may perform layer mapping on the modulation symbols by using a module or unit such as a layer mapping module to determine the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S440，发送设备#B可以对各传输层的调制符号序列分别进行扩展。In S440, the transmitting device #B may extend the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer separately.
其中，每个传输层的调制符号序列的扩展的过程可以与上述S230中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process of extending the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in the above S230. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
这里，每个传输层的扩展后的调制符号序列均包括K×L个调制符号。Here, the extended modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer includes K × L modulation symbols.
在S450，发送设备#B可以通过例如，调整模块等模块或单元，对扩展后的调制符号进行调整，该调制可以包括功率调整，或者，该调制可以包括相位调制。In S450, the transmitting device #B may adjust the expanded modulation symbol through a module or unit such as an adjustment module. The modulation may include power adjustment, or the modulation may include phase modulation.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S460，发送设备#B可以通过例如，预处理模块等模块或单元，对调制后的调制符号序列进行预处理。该预处理可以包括叠加，或者，该预处理可以包括预编码。In S460, the transmitting device #B may pre-process the modulated modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a pre-processing module. The pre-processing may include superposition, or the pre-processing may include pre-coding.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
需要说明的是，预处理后的调制符号序列可以包括K×L个调制符号。It should be noted that the pre-modulated modulation symbol sequence may include K × L modulation symbols.
在S470，发送设备#B可以通过例如，交织模块等模块或单元，以调制符号为单位，对预处理后的调制符号进行交织。In S470, the transmitting device #B may interleave the pre-modulated modulation symbols by using a module or a unit such as an interleaving module in units of modulation symbols.
其中，该过程可以与S240中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that of the sending device #A in S240. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
在S480，发送设备#B可以通过例如，发送模块等模块或单元，将交织后的调制符号进行资源映射及发送。In S480, the transmitting device #B may perform resource mapping and transmission of the interleaved modulation symbols through a module or a unit such as a transmitting module.
其中，该过程可以与S250中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in S250. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
图18示出了接收设备#B接收数据的过程500，其中，该数据可以是上述发送设备#B发送的数据，或者说，该接收设备#B可以是该发送设备#B所发送的数据的接收端。FIG. 18 shows a process 500 of receiving data by the receiving device #B. The data may be data sent by the sending device #B, or the receiving device #B may be data sent by the sending device #B. Receiving end.
其中，该数据可以理解为调制信号，或者，该数据可以理解为承载于调制符号中的数据。The data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
在S510，接收设备#B可以通过时频资源接收来自发送设备(例如，发送设备#A)的调制符号序列。In S510, the receiving device #B may receive the modulation symbol sequence from the transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through the time-frequency resource.
可选地，该调制符号序列可以是发送设备可以以RB集为单位交织后的调制符号序列。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
此情况下，接收设备#B可以以RB集为单位对该调制符号序列进行解交织。In this case, the receiving device #B may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
其中，上述各过程可以与现有技术相似，这里为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The above processes may be similar to the prior art. To avoid redundant descriptions, detailed descriptions are omitted here.
在S520，接收设备#B可以调制符号为单位，对调制符号序列进行解交织。In S520, the receiving device #B may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence as a unit.
其中，该解交织的过程可以与上述S420中接收设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The de-interleaving process may be similar to the processing process of the receiving device #A in the above S420. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
即，该解交织是以调制符号为颗粒度(或者说，单位)进行的。That is, the deinterleaving is performed with a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
在S530，接收设备#B可以对该调制符号进行多层联合译码，以获取多个传输层中每个传输层的调制符号。In S530, the receiving device #B may perform multi-layer joint decoding on the modulation symbol to obtain the modulation symbol of each transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S540，接收设备#B可以通过例如解扩模块或单元，对调制符号序列进行符号解扩。In S540, the receiving device #B may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
在S550，接收设备#B可以通过例如，解调模块等模块或单元，对解扩后的调制符号序列进行解调。In S550, the receiving device #B may demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence through a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
在S560，接收设备#B可以通过例如，比特解扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特解扰，得到原始比特。In S560, the receiving device #B may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
图19示出了发送设备#C发送数据的过程600，如图19所示，在S610，发送设备#C可以通过例如，比特加扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特加扰，得到加扰后的比特。FIG. 19 shows a process 600 of transmitting data by the transmitting device #C. As shown in FIG. 19, in S610, the transmitting device #C may perform bit scrambling on the input bits through, for example, a module or unit such as a bit scrambling module to obtain Scrambled bits.
其中，该过程可以与S210中发生设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the process of the occurrence of the device #A in S210. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
在S620，发送设备#C可以通过例如，调制模块等模块或单元，对加扰后的比特进行调制，得到调制符号序列，其中，该调制符号序列可以包括一个或多个调制符号。In S620, the transmitting device #C may modulate the scrambled bits through a module or unit such as a modulation module to obtain a modulation symbol sequence, where the modulation symbol sequence may include one or more modulation symbols.
其中，该过程可以与S220中发生设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the process of generating device #A in S220. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
在S630，发送设备#C可以通过例如，层映射模块等模块或单元，对调制符号进行层映射，以确定多个传输层所分别对应的调制符号序列。In S630, the transmitting device #C may perform layer mapping on the modulation symbols through, for example, a layer mapping module and the like to determine the modulation symbol sequences corresponding to the multiple transmission layers.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S640，发送设备#C可以对各传输层的调制符号序列分别进行扩展。In S640, the transmitting device #C may separately extend the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer.
其中，每个传输层的调制符号序列的扩展的过程可以与上述S230中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process of extending the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the sending device #A in the above S230. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
这里，每个传输层的扩展后的调制符号序列均包括K×L个调制符号。Here, the extended modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer includes K × L modulation symbols.
在S650，发送设备#C可以通过例如，调整模块等模块或单元，对扩展后的调制符号进行调整，该调制可以包括功率调整，或者，该调制可以包括相位调制。In S650, the transmitting device #C may adjust the extended modulation symbol through a module or unit such as an adjustment module. The modulation may include power adjustment, or the modulation may include phase modulation.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S660，发送设备#C可以通过例如，交织模块等模块或单元，以调制符号为单位，对预处理后的调制符号进行交织。In S660, the transmitting device #C may interleave the pre-modulated modulation symbols by using a module or a unit such as an interleaving module in units of modulation symbols.
其中，该过程可以与S240中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that of the sending device #A in S240. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
在S670，发送设备#C可以通过例如，预处理模块等模块或单元，对交织后的调制符号序列进行预处理。该预处理可以包括叠加，或者，该预处理可以包括预编码。In S670, the transmitting device #C may preprocess the interleaved modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a preprocessing module. The pre-processing may include superposition, or the pre-processing may include pre-coding.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
需要说明的是，预处理后的调制符号序列可以包括K×L个调制符号。It should be noted that the pre-modulated modulation symbol sequence may include K × L modulation symbols.
在S680，发送设备#C可以通过例如，发送模块等模块或单元，将交织后的调制符号进行资源映射及发送。In S680, the transmitting device #C may perform resource mapping and transmission of the interleaved modulation symbols through a module or a unit such as a transmitting module.
其中，该过程可以与S250中发送设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省 略其详细说明。The process may be similar to the process of sending device #A in S250. Here, to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
图20示出了接收设备#C接收数据的过程700，其中，该数据可以是上述发送设备#C发送的数据，或者说，该接收设备#C可以是该发送设备#C所发送的数据的接收端。FIG. 20 shows a process 700 of receiving data by the receiving device #C. The data may be data sent by the sending device #C, or the receiving device #C may be data sent by the sending device #C. Receiving end.
其中，该数据可以理解为调制信号，或者，该数据可以理解为承载于调制符号中的数据。The data may be understood as a modulated signal, or the data may be understood as data carried in a modulation symbol.
在S710，接收设备#C可以通过时频资源接收来自发送设备(例如，发送设备#A)的调制符号序列。In S710, the receiving device #C may receive the modulation symbol sequence from the transmitting device (for example, the transmitting device #A) through the time-frequency resource.
可选地，该调制符号序列可以是发送设备可以以RB集为单位交织后的调制符号序列。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence may be a modulation symbol sequence that can be interleaved by the sending device in units of RB sets.
此情况下，接收设备#C可以以RB集为单位对该调制符号序列进行解交织。In this case, the receiving device #C may deinterleave the modulation symbol sequence in units of RB sets.
其中，上述各过程可以与现有技术相似，这里为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The above processes may be similar to the prior art. To avoid redundant descriptions, detailed descriptions are omitted here.
在S720，接收设备#C可以对该调制符号进行多层联合译码，以获取多个传输层中每个传输层的调制符号。In S720, the receiving device #C may perform multi-layer joint decoding on the modulation symbol to obtain the modulation symbol of each transmission layer in the multiple transmission layers.
其中，该过程可以与现有技术相似，这里，为了避免和赘述，省略其详细说明。The process may be similar to that in the prior art. Here, in order to avoid and repeat, detailed description is omitted.
在S730，接收设备#C可以调制符号为单位，对每个传输层的调制符号序列进行解交织。In S730, the receiving device #C may demodulate the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer as a unit.
其中，每个传输层的调制符号序列的解交织的过程可以与上述S420中接收设备#A的处理过程相似，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The process of de-interleaving the modulation symbol sequence of each transmission layer may be similar to the processing process of the receiving device #A in the above S420. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
即，该解交织是以调制符号为颗粒度(或者说，单位)进行的。That is, the deinterleaving is performed with a modulation symbol as a granularity (or a unit).
在S740，接收设备#C可以通过例如解扩模块或单元，对调制符号序列进行符号解扩。In S740, the receiving device #C may perform symbol despreading on the modulation symbol sequence through, for example, a despreading module or unit.
在S750，接收设备#C可以通过例如，解调模块等模块或单元，对解扩后的调制符号序列进行解调。In S750, the receiving device #C can demodulate the despread modulation symbol sequence by using a module or unit such as a demodulation module.
在S760，接收设备#C可以通过例如，比特解扰模块等模块或单元，对输入比特进行比特解扰，得到原始比特。In S760, the receiving device #C may perform bit descrambling on the input bits through a module or unit such as a bit descrambling module to obtain the original bits.
根据本申请提供的方案，由于同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在扩频后的调制符号序列中通常连续，因此，通过使发送设备以调制符号为单位，对待发送的调制符号序列进行交织，并将交织后的调制符号序列映射在资源单元上，从而，能够使同一用户或同一业务的调制符号在频域上分散，即，能够提高分集增益，从而能够提高通信的可靠性、准确性和效率。According to the solution provided in this application, since the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service are usually continuous in the modulation symbol sequence after spreading, the modulation symbol sequence to be transmitted is interleaved by making the transmitting device use the modulation symbol as a unit, and The interleaved modulation symbol sequence is mapped on the resource unit, so that the modulation symbols of the same user or the same service can be dispersed in the frequency domain, that is, the diversity gain can be improved, thereby improving the reliability, accuracy and efficiency of communication .
根据前述方法，图21为本申请实施例提供的发送调制符号的的装置10的示意图，如图21所示，该装置10可以为调制符号的发送设备，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于发送设备的芯片或电路。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a device 10 for transmitting a modulation symbol according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 21, the device 10 may be a device for transmitting a modulation symbol, or may be a chip or a circuit. Or circuit for a transmitting device.
该装置10可以包括处理单元11(即，处理单元的一例)和存储单元12。该存储单元12用于存储指令，该处理单元11用于执行该存储单元12存储的指令，以使该波束检测的装置10实现如图2中对应的方法中发送设备(例如，上述发送设备#A)执行的步骤。The device 10 may include a processing unit 11 (that is, an example of a processing unit) and a storage unit 12. The storage unit 12 is configured to store instructions, and the processing unit 11 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 12 to enable the apparatus 10 for beam detection to implement a sending device (for example, the sending device # described above) corresponding to the method in FIG. 2. A) Steps performed.
进一步的，该装置10还可以包括输出口14(即，通信单元的另一例)。进一步的，该处理单元11、存储单元12和输出口14可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。该存储单元12用于存储计算机程序，该处理单元11可以用于从该存储单元12中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输出口14发送信号，完成上述方法中发送设备的步骤。该存储单元12可以集成在处理单元11中，也可以与处理单元11分开设置。Further, the device 10 may further include an output port 14 (ie, another example of a communication unit). Further, the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals. The storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 may be used to call and run the calculator program from the storage unit 12 to control the output port 14 to send signals and complete the steps of the sending device in the above method. The storage unit 12 may be integrated in the processing unit 11, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 11.
可选地，若该装置10为发送设备，该输出口14为发送器。Optionally, if the device 10 is a transmitting device, the output port 14 is a transmitter.
可选地，若该装置10为芯片或电路，该输出口14为输出接口。Optionally, if the device 10 is a chip or a circuit, the output port 14 is an output interface.
作为一种实现方式，输出口14的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元11可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the function of the output port 14 may be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备。即将实现处理单元11和输出口14功能的程序代码存储在存储单元12中，通用处理单元通过执行存储单元12中的代码来实现处理单元11和输出口14的功能。As another implementation manner, a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 11 and the output port 14 is stored in the storage unit 12. The general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11 and the output port 14 by executing the codes in the storage unit 12.
在本申请实施例中，该处理单元11可以根据扩展因子L，对包括多个调制符号的调制符号序列进行扩展，其中，扩展后的调制符号序列包括K×L个调制符号，其中，L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；并且，该处理单元11可以以调制符号为单位，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；该处理单元11可以控制输出口14将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送。In the embodiment of the present application, the processing unit 11 may expand a modulation symbol sequence including multiple modulation symbols according to an expansion factor L, where the extended modulation symbol sequence includes K × L modulation symbols, where L is An integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Moreover, the processing unit 11 may perform the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols; the processing unit 11 may control the output port 14 to pass through The modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and transmitted.
可选地，扩展后的调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
可选地，该处理单元11可以用于以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。Optionally, the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence by using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
可选地，该T的值为预定义的值。Optionally, the value of T is a predefined value.
可选地，该T的值为网络设备通过高层信令配置的值。Optionally, the value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
可选地，该处理单元11可以用于根据该扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L.
可选地，该处理单元11可以用于根据该扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，该第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；该处理单元11可以用于按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，将待第一交织的调制符号填充至该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；该处理单元11可以用于按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号。Optionally, the processing unit 11 may be configured to determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer; the processing unit 11 may be used to perform the calculation according to the first The column direction of the interleaving matrix fills the modulation symbol to be interleaved first into the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix; the processing unit 11 may be configured to correspond to the first interleaving matrix according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix. Output the first interleaved modulation symbol in the storage space of.
可选地，该处理单元11可以用于根据第一移位值，对该第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。Optionally, the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform cyclic shift on the elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix. .
可选地，该第一移位值是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。Optionally, the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
可选地，该处理单元11可以用于根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；该处理单元11可以用于根据该第一交织序列，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, the processing unit 11 may be configured to determine a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform an extended The subsequent modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
可选地，当该装置10配置在终端设备，或者，该装置10本身即为终端设备时，该终端设备还可以接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示扩展后的调制符号序列是否需要被第一交织；以及该处理单元11可以用于当该第一指示信息指示扩展后的调制符号序列需要被第一交织时，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Optionally, when the device 10 is configured in a terminal device, or when the device 10 is a terminal device itself, the terminal device may also receive first instruction information sent by a network device, where the first instruction information is used to indicate that after the extension Whether the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved; and the processing unit 11 may be configured to perform first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence when the first indication information indicates that the extended modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved. .
可选地，当该装置10配置在网络设备，或者，该装置10本身即为网络设备时，该网络设备还可以向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该扩展后的调制符号序列被进行了第一交织。Optionally, when the apparatus 10 is configured on a network device, or when the apparatus 10 is a network device itself, the network device may further send second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the extension The modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
可选地，经过第一交织后的调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资 源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数。Optionally, the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs, each Each PRB set includes S PRBs, where S is an integer greater than or equal to one.
此情况下，该处理单元11可以用于以VRB集为单位，对将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列进行第二交织；该处理单元11可以用于控制输出口14将经过第二交织后的调制符号序列中的多个VRB映射到多个虚拟资源块VRB集上并发送。In this case, the processing unit 11 may be used to perform the second interleaving on the VRB set as a unit, and the processing unit 11 may be used to control the output port 14 to undergo the second interleaving. Multiple VRBs in the modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and sent.
其中，以上列举的装置10中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，装置10中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中发送设备(例如，发送设备#A、发送设备#B或发送设备#C)所执行的各动作或处理过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The functions and actions of the modules or units in the device 10 listed above are only examples, and the modules or units in the device 10 may be used to execute the sending device (for example, sending device #A, sending device #B) in the above method. Or each action or process performed by the sending device #C). Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
该装置10所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。For concepts, explanations and detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application related to the device 10, please refer to the description of the content in the foregoing method or other embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
另外，在本申请中，该处理单元11可以由图23所示的终端设备的处理单元202构成，该输出口14可以由图23所示的终端设备的收发单元201构成。In addition, in the present application, the processing unit 11 may be configured by the processing unit 202 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23, and the output port 14 may be configured by the transceiver unit 201 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23.
或者，该处理单元11可以由图24所示的网络设备的基带单元402构成。该输出口14可以由图24所示的网络设备的远端射频单元401构成。Alternatively, the processing unit 11 may be configured by the baseband unit 402 of the network device shown in FIG. 24. The output port 14 may be formed by a remote radio frequency unit 401 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
根据前述方法，图22为本申请实施例提供的接收调制符号的装置30的示意图，如图22所示，该装置30可以为接收设备(例如，接收设备#A)，也可以为芯片或电路，如可设置于网络设备内的芯片或电路。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus 30 for receiving a modulation symbol according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 22, the apparatus 30 may be a receiving device (for example, receiving device #A), or a chip or a circuit. , Such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a network device.
该装置30可以包括处理单元31和存储单元32。该存储单元32用于存储指令，该处理单元31用于执行该存储单元32存储的指令，以使该装置30实现前述方法中网络设备执行的步骤。The device 30 may include a processing unit 31 and a storage unit 32. The storage unit 32 is configured to store instructions, and the processing unit 31 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 32 to enable the apparatus 30 to implement the steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method.
进一步的，该装置30还可以包括输入口33(即，通信单元的一例)。Further, the device 30 may further include an input port 33 (ie, an example of a communication unit).
再进一步的，该处理单元31、存储单元32和输入口33可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。Still further, the processing unit 31, the storage unit 32, and the input port 33 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的网络设备。即将实现处理单元31和输入口33功能的程序代码存储在存储单元中，通用处理单元通过执行存储单元中的代码来实现处理单元31和输入口33的功能。As another implementation manner, a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the network device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The program code that implements the functions of the processing unit 31 and the input port 33 is stored in a storage unit, and the general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 31 and the input port 33 by executing the code in the storage unit.
该存储单元32用于存储计算机程序，该处理单元31可以用于从该存储单元32中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口33通过K×L个资源单元接收包括K×L个调制符号的调制符号序列，其中，L为扩展因子，且L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；用于以调制符号为单位，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织；用于根据扩展因子L，对第一解交织后的调制符号序列进行解扩。The storage unit 32 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 31 may be used to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the input port 33 to receive K × L modulations through K × L resource units. The modulation symbol sequence of the symbol, where L is an expansion factor, L is an integer greater than 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1; it is used for first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence in units of modulation symbols; Based on the spreading factor L, the first deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence is despread.
可选地，该调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols.
可选地，该处理单元31可以用于以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一解交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。Optionally, the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence by using T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
可选地，该T的值为预定义的值。Optionally, the value of T is a predefined value.
可选地，该T的值为网络设备通过高层信令配置的值。Optionally, the value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
可选地，该处理单元31可以用于根据该扩展因子L，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
可选地，该处理单元31可以用于根据该扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，该第一交 织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；按照该第一交织矩阵的行方向，将待第一解交织的调制符号填充至该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；按照该第一交织矩阵的列方向，从该第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号。Optionally, the processing unit 31 may be configured to determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L. The first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, where N is a positive integer; according to a row direction of the first interleaving matrix, The first deinterleaved modulation symbol is filled into the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix; according to the column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output from the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix. .
可选地，该处理单元31可以用于根据第一移位值，对该第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，该第i列是该第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。Optionally, the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform a cyclic shift on the elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix. .
可选地，该第一移位值是根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。Optionally, the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which the receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
可选地，该处理单元31可以用于根据该调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；用于根据该第一交织序列，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Optionally, the processing unit 31 may be configured to determine a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located; and used to perform a first interleaving sequence on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first interleaving sequence. Deinterlacing.
可选地，当该装置30配置在终端设备中，或者，该装置10本身即为终端设备时，该终端设备还用于接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示调制符号序列在被解扩之前是否需要被第一解交织。Optionally, when the device 30 is configured in a terminal device, or the device 10 itself is a terminal device, the terminal device is further configured to receive first instruction information sent by a network device, where the first instruction information is used to indicate Whether the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first deinterleaved before being despread.
此情况下，该处理单元31可以用于当该第一指示信息指示调制符号序列在被解扩之前需要被第一交织时，对该调制符号序列进行第一解交织。In this case, the processing unit 31 may be configured to perform first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence when the first indication information indicates that the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved before being despread.
可选地，当该装置30配置在网络设备中，或者，该装置10本身即为网络设备时，该网络设备还用于向终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示调制符号序列在被映射在资源单元之前需要被第一交织。Optionally, when the apparatus 30 is configured in a network device, or when the apparatus 10 is a network device itself, the network device is further configured to send second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate modulation The symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved before being mapped on the resource unit.
可选地，该调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，该K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数。Optionally, the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, where each VRB set includes S VRBs and each PRB set includes S PRB, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
此情况下，该处理单元31还可以用于以VRB集为单位，对该调制符号序列进行第二交织；用于对经过该第二解交织后的调制符号序列，进行第一解交织。In this case, the processing unit 31 may be further configured to perform a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence by using the VRB set as a unit; and perform a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
其中，以上列举的装置30中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，装置30中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中接收设备(例如，接收设备#A、接收设备#B或接收设备#C)所执行的各动作或处理过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。The functions and actions of each module or unit in the device 30 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and each module or unit in the device 30 may be used to perform a receiving device (for example, receiving device #A, receiving device #B) in the above method. Or each action or process performed by the receiving device #C). Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.
该装置30所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。For concepts, explanations, and detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application related to the device 30, please refer to the descriptions of these contents in the foregoing method or other embodiments, and are not described herein.
另外，在本申请中，该处理单元31可以由图23所示的终端设备的处理单元202构成，该输入口33可以由图23所示的终端设备的收发单元201构成。In addition, in the present application, the processing unit 31 may be constituted by the processing unit 202 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23, and the input port 33 may be constituted by the transceiving unit 201 of the terminal device shown in FIG. 23.
或者，该处理单元31可以由图24所示的网络设备的基带单元402构成。该输入口33可以由图24所示的网络设备的远端射频单元401构成。Alternatively, the processing unit 31 may be configured by the baseband unit 402 of the network device shown in FIG. 24. The input port 33 may be formed by a remote radio frequency unit 401 of the network device shown in FIG. 24.
图23为本申请提供的一种终端设备20的结构示意图。为了便于说明，图23仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图23所示，终端设备20包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided in this application. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 23 shows only the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 23, the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对整个终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据，例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据，例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处 理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器，主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process the data of the software program. For example, the processor is used to support the terminal device to execute the foregoing method for transmitting a precoding matrix. The described action. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, such as the codebook described in the foregoing embodiment. The control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input / output devices, such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
当终端设备开机后，处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序，解释并执行软件程序的指令，处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When the data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解，为了便于说明，图23仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中，可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等，本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 23 shows only one memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
作为一种可选的实现方式，处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器，基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。图23中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能，本领域技术人员可以理解，基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器，通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解，终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式，终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力，终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中，也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中，由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。As an optional implementation manner, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processor. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processor is mainly used to control and execute the entire terminal device. A software program that processes data from a software program. The processor in FIG. 23 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing communication protocols and communication data may be built in the processor or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
示例性的，在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备20的收发单元201，其中，控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理，并且，可以将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备20的处理单元202。如图23所示，终端设备20包括收发单元201和处理单元202。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元201中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元201中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元201包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的，接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the control circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as the transmitting and receiving unit 201 of the terminal device 20. The control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the radio frequency signal. Processing, and a processor having a processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20. As shown in FIG. 23, the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, and the like, and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit and the like.
在本申请中，该终端设备可以作为信号或数据的发送设备而执行上述过程200、400或600中发送设备执行的动作。In this application, the terminal device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 200, 400, or 600 as a sending device of a signal or data.
此情况下，例如，处理单元202可以执行上述装置10中处理单元11执行的动作；或者说，该处理单元202可以执行S210、S220、S230、S240中的动作。In this case, for example, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 11 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions in S210, S220, S230, and S240.
并且，此情况下，例如，收发单元201可以执行上述装置10中输出口14执行的动作；或者说，该收发单元201可以执行S250中的动作。或者，在本申请中，该终端设备可以作为信号或数据的接收设备而执行上述过程300、500或700中发送设备执行的动作。Moreover, in this case, for example, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action performed by the output port 14 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S250. Alternatively, in this application, the terminal device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 300, 500, or 700 as a signal or data receiving device.
此情况下，例如，收发单元201可以执行上述装置30中输入口33执行的动作；或者说，该收发单元201可以执行S310中的动作In this case, for example, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action performed by the input port 33 in the foregoing device 30; or, in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S310.
并且，此情况下，例如，处理单元202可以执行上述装置30中处理单元31执行的动作；或者说，该处理单元202可以执行S320、S330、S340和S350中的动作。Moreover, in this case, for example, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 31 in the device 30 described above; or in other words, the processing unit 202 may perform the actions in S320, S330, S340, and S350.
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备40的结构示意图，可以用于实现上述方法中的网络设备(例如，接入网设备#A或核心网设备#α)的功能。网络设备40包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)401和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)(也可称为数字单元，digital unit，DU)402。所述RRU 401可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线4011和射频单元4012。所述RRU 401部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的信令消息。所述BBU 402部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 401与BBU 402可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 according to an embodiment of the present application, which may be used to implement functions of a network device (for example, an access network device #A or a core network device # α) in the foregoing method. The network device 40 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also known as digital units, DUs). 402. The RRU 401 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012. The RRU 401 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending a signaling message described in the foregoing embodiment to a terminal device. The BBU 402 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling base stations. The RRU 401 and the BBU 402 may be physically located together, or may be physically separated from each other, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 402为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理单元，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如该BBU(处理单元)402可以用于控制基站40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The BBU 402 is a control center of a base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spreading, and so on. For example, the BBU (Processing Unit) 402 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure on the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
在本申请中，该网络设备可以作为信号或数据的发送设备而执行上述过程200、400或600中发送设备执行的动作。In this application, the network device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 200, 400, or 600 as a sending device of a signal or data.
此情况下，例如，BBU 402可以执行上述装置10中处理单元11执行的动作；或者说，该BBU 402可以执行S210、S220、S230、S240中的动作。In this case, for example, the BBU 402 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 11 in the foregoing device 10; or, in other words, the BBU 402 may perform the actions in S210, S220, S230, and S240.
并且，此情况下，例如，RRU 401可以执行上述装置10中输出口14执行的动作；或者说，该收发单元201可以执行S250中的动作。Moreover, in this case, for example, the RRU 401 may perform the action performed by the output port 14 in the foregoing device 10; or in other words, the transceiver unit 201 may perform the action in S250.
或者，在本申请中，该网络设备可以作为信号或数据的接收设备而执行上述过程300、500或700中发送设备执行的动作。Alternatively, in this application, the network device may perform the actions performed by the sending device in the foregoing process 300, 500, or 700 as a signal or data receiving device.
此情况下，例如，RRU 401可以执行上述装置30中输入口33执行的动作；或者说，该RRU 401可以执行S310中的动作In this case, for example, the RRU 401 may perform the action performed by the input port 33 in the above device 30; or, in other words, the RRU 401 may perform the action in S310.
并且，此情况下，例如，BBU 402可以执行上述装置30中处理单元31执行的动作；或者说，该BBU 402可以执行S320、S330、S340和S350中的动作。And, in this case, for example, the BBU 402 may perform the actions performed by the processing unit 31 in the above device 30; or, in other words, the BBU 402 may perform the actions in S320, S330, S340, and S350.
在一个示例中，所述BBU 402可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE***，或5G***)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU 402还包括存储器4021和处理器4022。所述存储器4021用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器4021存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器4022用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器4021和处理器4022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In one example, the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a single access system wireless access network (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), or may separately support different Access standard wireless access network. The BBU 402 further includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022. The memory 4021 is configured to store necessary instructions and data. For example, the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the foregoing embodiment. The processor 4022 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 4021 and the processor 4022 may serve one or more single boards. That is, the memory and processor can be set separately on each board. It may also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.
在一种可能的实施方式中，随着片上***(ssystem-on-chip，SoC)技术的发展，可以将402部分和401部分的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现，例如由一颗基站功能芯片实现，该基站功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、天线接口等器件，基站相关功能的程序存储在存储器中，由处理器执行程序以实现基站的相关功能。可选的，该基站功能芯片也能够读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现基站的相关功能。In a possible implementation manner, with the development of system-on-chip (SoC) technology, all or part of the functions of part 402 and part 401 may be implemented by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip To achieve, the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices. A program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the base station related functions. Optionally, the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
应理解，图24示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的基站结构的可能。It should be understood that the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 24 is only one possible form, and should not be construed as any limitation in the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of base station structures that may appear in the future.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请实施例还提供一种通信***，其包括前述的网络设备和一个或多于一个终端设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system including the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.
应理解，本申请实施例中，该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and special-purpose integrations. Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example, but not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access Access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM).
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination. When implemented using software, the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are wholly or partially generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, a computer, a server, or a data center. Transmission by wire (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term “and / or” herein is only an association relationship describing an associated object, and indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and / or B can mean: A exists alone, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this text generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程 构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not deal with the embodiments of this application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的***、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的***、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. A professional technician can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application. Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated here. In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. When the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. It should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (25)

  1. 一种发送调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method for transmitting a modulation symbol, comprising:
    根据扩展因子L，对包括多个调制符号的调制符号序列进行扩展，其中，扩展后的调制符号序列包括K×L个调制符号，其中，L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；The modulation symbol sequence including a plurality of modulation symbols is extended according to the expansion factor L. The extended modulation symbol sequence includes K × L modulation symbols, where L is an integer greater than 1 and K is an integer greater than or equal to Integer
    对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织；First interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence;
    将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送。The modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence are mapped onto K × L resource units and transmitted.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，扩展后的调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号，以及The method according to claim 1, wherein the extended modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols, and
    所述对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：The first interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence includes:
    以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。Take T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and perform the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述T的值为预定义的值；或者The method according to claim 2, wherein the value of T is a predefined value; or
    所述T的值为网络设备通过高层信令配置的值。The value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence comprises:
    根据所述扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Performing a first interleaving on the spread modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述扩展因子L，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：The method according to claim 4, wherein the first interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence according to the extension factor L comprises:
    根据所述扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，所述第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；Determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer;
    按照所述第一交织矩阵的列方向，将待第一交织的调制符号填充至所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；Filling, according to a column direction of the first interleaving matrix, a modulation symbol to be first interleaved into a storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix;
    按照所述第一交织矩阵的行方向，从所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号。According to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix, a first interleaved modulation symbol is output from a storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，在按照所述第一交织矩阵的行方向，从所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一交织后的调制符号之前，所述第一交织还包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein before the first interleaved modulation symbol is output from a storage space corresponding to the first interleaved matrix according to a row direction of the first interleaved matrix, the first An interlace also includes:
    根据第一移位值，对所述第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，所述第i列是所述第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。Cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一移位值是根据所述调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The method according to claim 6, wherein the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiver device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  8. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein performing the first interleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence comprises:
    根据所述调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；Determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located;
    根据所述第一交织序列，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Performing first interleaving on the spread modulation symbol sequence according to the first interleaving sequence.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示对扩展后的调制符号 序列进行第一交织；以及Receiving first indication information sent by a network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct first interleaving of an extended modulation symbol sequence; and
    所述对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织包括：The first interleaving the extended modulation symbol sequence includes:
    根据所述第一指示信息，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一交织。Performing first interleaving on the spread modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
  10. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the method further comprises:
    向终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述扩展后的调制符号序列被进行了第一交织。Send second instruction information to the terminal device, where the second instruction information is used to indicate that the extended modulation symbol sequence is first interleaved.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，经过第一交织后的调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，所述K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数，以及The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resources A block PRB set, where each VRB set includes S VRBs, each PRB set includes S PRBs, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and
    所述将经过第一交织后的调制符号序列中的调制符号映射到K×L个资源单元上并发送，包括：The mapping and transmitting the modulation symbols in the first interleaved modulation symbol sequence to K × L resource units includes:
    以VRB集为单位，对经过第一交织后的调制符号序列进行第二交织；Perform a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the first interleaving, using the VRB set as a unit;
    将经过第二交织后的调制符号序列中的多个VRB映射到多个虚拟资源块VRB集上并发送。Map multiple VRBs in the second interleaved modulation symbol sequence to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets and send them.
  12. 一种接收调制符号的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method for receiving a modulation symbol, comprising:
    通过K×L个资源单元接收包括K×L个调制符号的调制符号序列，其中，L为扩展因子，且L为大于1的整数，K为大于或等于1的整数；Receiving a modulation symbol sequence including K × L modulation symbols through K × L resource units, where L is an expansion factor, L is an integer greater than 1, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
    对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织；Performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence;
    根据扩展因子L，对第一解交织后的调制符号序列进行解扩。According to the spreading factor L, the first deinterleaved modulation symbol sequence is despread.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述调制符号序列对应一个或多个正交频分复用OFDM符号，以及The method according to claim 12, wherein the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexed OFDM symbols, and
    所述对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：The first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence includes:
    以T个OFDM符号作为一个交织块，对扩展后的调制符号序列进行第一解交织，T为大于或等于1的整数。Take T OFDM symbols as one interleaving block, and perform the first deinterleaving on the extended modulation symbol sequence, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述T的值为预定义的值；或者The method according to claim 13, wherein the value of T is a predefined value; or
    所述T的值为网络设备通过高层信令配置的值。The value of T is a value configured by the network device through high-level signaling.
  15. 根据权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：The method according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence comprises:
    根据所述扩展因子L，对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述扩展因子L，对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：The method according to claim 15, wherein the first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence according to the spreading factor L comprises:
    根据所述扩展因子L，确定第一交织矩阵，所述第一交织矩阵包括N×L行，N为正整数；Determine a first interleaving matrix according to the expansion factor L, where the first interleaving matrix includes N × L rows, and N is a positive integer;
    按照所述第一交织矩阵的行方向，将待第一解交织的调制符号填充至所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间；Filling the storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix with the modulation symbols to be first deinterleaved according to the row direction of the first interleaving matrix;
    按照所述第一交织矩阵的列方向，从所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号。According to a column direction of the first interleaving matrix, a first deinterleaved modulation symbol is output from a storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，在按照所述第一交织矩阵的列方向， 从所述第一交织矩阵对应的存储空间中输出第一解交织后的调制符号之前，所述第一解交织还包括：The method according to claim 16, characterized in that before outputting a first deinterleaved modulation symbol from a storage space corresponding to the first interleaving matrix according to a column direction of the first interleaving matrix, the method The first deinterleaving also includes:
    根据第一移位值，对所述第一交织矩阵的第i列中的元素进行循环移位，所述第i列是所述第一交织矩阵中的任意一列。Cyclically shift elements in the i-th column of the first interleaving matrix according to the first shift value, where the i-th column is any one of the first interleaving matrix.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一移位值是根据所述调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识确定的。The method according to claim 17, wherein the first shift value is determined according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiver device of the modulation symbol sequence is located.
  19. 根据权利要求12至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：The method according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence comprises:
    根据所述调制符号序列的接收端设备所处于的小区的小区标识，确定第一交织序列；Determining a first interleaving sequence according to a cell identifier of a cell in which a receiving-end device of the modulation symbol sequence is located;
    根据所述第一交织序列，对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first interleaving sequence.
  20. 根据权利要求12至19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 12 to 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于对调制符号序列进行第一解交织；以及Receiving first indication information sent by a network device, where the first indication information is used for first deinterleaving a modulation symbol sequence; and
    所述对调制符号序列进行第一解交织包括：The first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence includes:
    根据所述第一指示信息，对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织。Performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence according to the first indication information.
  21. 根据权利要求12至19中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 12 to 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    向终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示调制符号序列在被映射在资源单元之前需要被第一交织。Send the second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the modulation symbol sequence needs to be first interleaved before being mapped on the resource unit.
  22. 根据权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述调制符号序列对应多个虚拟资源块VRB集，所述K×L个资源单元对应多个物理资源块PRB集，其中，每个VRB集包括S个VRB，每个PRB集包括S个PRB，S为大于或等于1的整数，以及The method according to any one of claims 12 to 21, wherein the modulation symbol sequence corresponds to multiple virtual resource block VRB sets, and the K × L resource units correspond to multiple physical resource block PRB sets, Each VRB set includes S VRBs, each PRB set includes S PRBs, S is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and
    在对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织之前，所述方法还包括：Before the first deinterleaving of the modulation symbol sequence, the method further includes:
    以VRB集为单位，对所述调制符号序列进行第二交织；Performing a second interleaving on the modulation symbol sequence with a VRB set as a unit;
    所述对所述调制符号序列进行第一解交织，包括：The first deinterleaving the modulation symbol sequence includes:
    对经过所述第二解交织后的调制符号序列，进行第一解交织。Performing a first deinterleaving on the modulation symbol sequence after the second deinterleaving.
  23. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, comprising:
    处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述通信设备执行权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法。A processor for executing a computer program stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 22.
  24. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至22中任意一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1 to 22 Item.
  25. 一种芯片***，其特征在于，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片***的通信设备执行如权利要求1至22中任意一项所述的方法。A chip system, comprising: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 22. .
PCT/CN2019/092303 2018-06-21 2019-06-21 Method for sending modulation symbols, method for receiving modulation symbols and communication equipment WO2019242738A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810646764.6 2018-06-21
CN201810646764.6A CN110635863B (en) 2018-06-21 2018-06-21 Method for transmitting modulation symbol, method for receiving modulation symbol and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019242738A1 true WO2019242738A1 (en) 2019-12-26

Family

ID=68967877

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/092303 WO2019242738A1 (en) 2018-06-21 2019-06-21 Method for sending modulation symbols, method for receiving modulation symbols and communication equipment

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110635863B (en)
WO (1) WO2019242738A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022141326A1 (en) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Interleaving and de-interleaving methods and apparatuses

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111212013B (en) * 2020-01-13 2022-06-24 宿州学院 Extended sequence generation method for MUSA system
CN117526996A (en) * 2022-08-03 2024-02-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110110219A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-05-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for balancing reference signal powers across ofdm symbols
CN103314545A (en) * 2011-01-14 2013-09-18 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Bundled codeword to layer mapping for MIMO with reduced signalling
WO2018054280A1 (en) * 2016-09-21 2018-03-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Methods for multiple access transmission

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1844564A1 (en) * 2005-02-03 2007-10-17 Vishay Intertechnology Inc. Method for interwoven spreading codes
CN101521514B (en) * 2008-10-13 2012-01-18 重庆无线绿洲通信技术有限公司 Q-ary coded modulation method combined with repeat accumulate code and device thereof
KR20150005853A (en) * 2013-07-05 2015-01-15 삼성전자주식회사 transmitter apparatus and signal processing method thereof
GB2532233A (en) * 2014-11-12 2016-05-18 Sony Corp Transmitter and receiver and methods of transmitting and receiving
CN106411456B (en) * 2015-07-31 2020-11-24 索尼公司 Signal processing system and method, base station and user equipment

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110110219A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-05-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for balancing reference signal powers across ofdm symbols
CN103314545A (en) * 2011-01-14 2013-09-18 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Bundled codeword to layer mapping for MIMO with reduced signalling
WO2018054280A1 (en) * 2016-09-21 2018-03-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Methods for multiple access transmission

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022141326A1 (en) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Interleaving and de-interleaving methods and apparatuses

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110635863B (en) 2021-06-01
CN110635863A (en) 2019-12-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11658772B2 (en) Electronic device and communication method for non-orthogonal-resource based multiple access
CN109802792B (en) Method for receiving reference signal and method for transmitting reference signal
US10924211B2 (en) Non-orthogonal data transmission method and device
US11632207B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink signal
CN108632193B (en) Resource indication method, network equipment and terminal equipment
KR102230746B1 (en) Communication methods, network devices, terminal devices, computer-readable storage media, computer program products, processing devices and communication systems
JP7467529B2 (en) Broadcast signal transmitting method, broadcast signal receiving method, network device, and terminal device
WO2019242738A1 (en) Method for sending modulation symbols, method for receiving modulation symbols and communication equipment
AU2019296415A1 (en) Data scrambling method and relevant device
WO2019214559A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2018081973A1 (en) Signal transmission method, terminal device, and network device
US11991112B2 (en) Symbol processing method and apparatus
US11770281B2 (en) Symbol processing method and apparatus
WO2019137299A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
CN112218375A (en) Method and device for determining resource allocation
WO2017047210A1 (en) Device and method
US20240039668A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining phase tracking reference signal pattern
WO2018228460A1 (en) Phase tracking reference signal processing method and apparatus
US20210195568A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US11943086B2 (en) Symbol processing method and apparatus
US20220116253A1 (en) Communication Method And Communication Apparatus
WO2022205022A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal
WO2024125523A1 (en) Codebook allocation methods and apparatuses, device, system, and storage medium
WO2023246525A1 (en) Data transmission method, device and apparatus, and storage medium
EP4336786A1 (en) Signal transmission method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19821706

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19821706

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1